MAINTENANCE MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Chapter 30

ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION

ATA PAGE DATE ATA PAGE DATE

30-00-00 1 March 31/06 30-10-00 401 October 15/09
30-00-00 2 March 31/06 30-10-00 402 October 15/09
30-00-00 3 March 31/06 30-10-00 403 October 15/09
30-00-00 4 March 31/06 30-10-00 404 October 15/09
30-00-00 601 October 31/13 30-10-00 501 July 15/18
30-00-00 602 October 31/13 30-10-00 502 July 15/18
30-00-00 603 October 31/13 30-10-00 503 July 15/18
30-00-00 604 October 31/13 30-10-00 504 July 15/18
30-00-00 605 October 31/13 30-10-00 505 July 15/18
30-00-00 606 October 31/13 30-10-00 506 July 15/18
30-00-00 607 October 31/13 30-10-00 507 July 15/18
30-00-00 608 October 31/13 30-10-00 508 July 15/18
30-00-00 609 October 31/13 30-10-00 509 July 15/18
30-00-00 610 October 31/13 30-10-00 510 July 15/18
30-00-00 611 October 31/13 30-10-00 511 July 15/18
30-00-00 612 October 31/13 30-10-00 512 July 15/18
30-00-00 613 October 31/13 30-10-00 513 July 15/18
30-00-00 614 October 31/13 30-10-00 514 July 15/18
30-00-00 615 October 31/13 30-10-05 401 August 30/16
30-00-00 616 October 31/13 30-10-05 402 August 30/16
30-10-00 1 October 31/11 30-10-05 403 August 30/16
30-10-00 2 October 31/11 30-10-05 404 August 30/16
30-10-00 3 October 31/11 30-10-10 101 July 15/19
30-10-00 4 October 31/11 30-10-10 102 July 15/19
30-10-00 5 October 31/11 30-10-10 401 November 30/08
30-10-00 6 October 31/11 30-10-10 402 November 30/08
30-10-00 7 October 31/11 30-10-10 403 November 30/08
30-10-00 8 October 31/11 30-10-10 404 November 30/08
30-10-00 9 October 31/11 30-10-10 405 November 30/08
30-10-00 10 October 31/11 30-10-10 406 November 30/08
30-10-00 11 October 31/11 30-10-10 501 August 30/16
30-10-00 12 October 31/11 30-10-10 502 August 30/16
30-10-00 13 October 31/11 30-10-10 503 August 30/16
30-10-00 14 October 31/11 30-10-10 504 August 30/16
30-10-00 15 October 31/11 30-10-10 505 August 30/16
30-10-00 16 October 31/11 30-10-10 506 August 30/16
30-10-00 17 October 31/11 30-10-10 507 August 30/16
30-10-00 18 October 31/11 30-10-10 508 August 30/16
30-10-00 19 October 31/11 30-10-15 401 April 30/09
30-10-00 20 October 31/11 30-10-15 402 April 30/09

* Pages revised by Revision 35 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

** Pages added by Revision 35 Page 1
*** Pages deleted by Revision 35 September 30/22
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ATA PAGE DATE ATA PAGE DATE

30-10-15 403 April 30/09 30-10-40 405 October 15/20
30-10-15 404 April 30/09 30-10-40 406 October 15/20
30-10-15 501 December 31/07 30-10-40 407 October 15/20
30-10-15 502 December 31/07 30-10-40 408 October 15/20
30-10-15 503 December 31/07 30-10-40 409 October 15/20
30-10-15 504 December 31/07 30-10-40 410 October 15/20
30-10-20 401 August 30/16 30-10-40 411 October 15/20
30-10-20 402 August 30/16 30-10-40 412 October 15/20
30-10-20 403 August 30/16 30-10-40 413 October 15/20
30-10-20 404 August 30/16 30-10-40 414 October 15/20
30-10-20 405 August 30/16 30-10-40 415 October 15/20
30-10-20 406 August 30/16 30-10-40 416 October 15/20
30-10-25 401 November 30/08 30-10-40 417 October 15/20
30-10-25 402 November 30/08 30-10-40 418 October 15/20
30-10-25 403 November 30/08 30-10-40 419 October 15/20
30-10-25 404 November 30/08 30-10-40 420 October 15/20
30-10-25 405 November 30/08 30-10-40 421 October 15/20
30-10-25 406 November 30/08 30-10-40 422 October 15/20
30-10-30 401 April 30/07 30-10-40 423 October 15/20
30-10-30 402 April 30/07 30-10-40 424 October 15/20
30-10-30 403 April 30/07 30-10-40 425 October 15/20
30-10-30 404 April 30/07 30-10-40 426 October 15/20
30-10-30 405 April 30/07 30-10-40 427 October 15/20
30-10-30 406 April 30/07 30-10-40 428 October 15/20
30-10-30 501 December 15/14 30-10-40 429 October 15/20
30-10-30 502 December 15/14 30-10-40 430 October 15/20
30-10-30 503 December 15/14 30-10-40 431 October 15/20
30-10-30 504 December 15/14 30-10-40 432 October 15/20
30-10-30 505 December 15/14 30-10-40 433 October 15/20
30-10-30 506 December 15/14 30-10-40 434 October 15/20
30-10-35 401 March 31/06 30-10-40 435 October 15/20
30-10-35 402 March 31/06 30-10-40 436 October 15/20
30-10-35 403 March 31/06 30-10-40 437 October 15/20
30-10-35 404 March 31/06 30-10-40 438 October 15/20
30-10-35 501 March 31/06 30-10-40 601 August 30/16
30-10-35 502 March 31/06 30-10-40 602 August 30/16
30-10-35 503 March 31/06 30-10-40 603 August 30/16
30-10-35 504 March 31/06 30-10-40 604 August 30/16
30-10-35 505 March 31/06 30-10-40 605 August 30/16
30-10-35 506 March 31/06 30-10-40 606 August 30/16
*30-10-40 301 September 30/22 30-10-40 607 August 30/16
*30-10-40 302 September 30/22 30-10-40 608 August 30/16
30-10-40 401 October 15/20 30-10-40 609 August 30/16
30-10-40 402 October 15/20 30-10-40 610 August 30/16
30-10-40 403 October 15/20 30-10-40 801 August 30/16
30-10-40 404 October 15/20 30-10-40 802 August 30/16

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES * Pages revised by Revision 35

Page 2 ** Pages added by Revision 35
September 30/22 *** Pages deleted by Revision 35
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ATA PAGE DATE ATA PAGE DATE

30-10-40 803 August 30/16 30-20-20 401 March 31/06
30-10-40 804 August 30/16 30-20-20 402 March 31/06
30-10-40 805 August 30/16 30-20-20 403 March 31/06
30-10-40 806 August 30/16 30-20-20 404 March 31/06
30-10-40 807 August 30/16 30-20-21 401 March 31/06
30-10-40 808 August 30/16 30-20-21 402 March 31/06
30-10-45 401 March 31/06 30-20-21 403 March 31/06
30-10-45 402 March 31/06 30-20-21 404 March 31/06
30-10-70 401 February 28/10 30-20-22 401 August 30/16
30-10-70 402 February 28/10 30-20-22 402 August 30/16
30-10-70 403 February 28/10 30-20-22 403 August 30/16
30-10-70 404 February 28/10 30-20-22 404 August 30/16
30-10-70 405 February 28/10 30-30-00 1 March 31/06
30-10-70 406 February 28/10 30-30-00 2 March 31/06
30-10-70 407 February 28/10 30-30-00 3 March 31/06
30-10-70 408 February 28/10 30-30-00 4 March 31/06
30-10-70 409 February 28/10 30-30-00 5 March 31/06
30-10-70 410 February 28/10 30-30-00 6 March 31/06
30-20-00 1 December 15/14 30-30-00 7 March 31/06
30-20-00 2 December 15/14 30-30-00 8 March 31/06
30-20-00 3 December 15/14 30-30-00 501 October 31/13
30-20-00 4 December 15/14 30-30-00 502 October 31/13
30-20-00 5 December 15/14 30-30-00 503 October 31/13
30-20-00 6 December 15/14 30-30-00 504 October 31/13
30-20-00 7 December 15/14 30-40-00 1 October 31/13
30-20-00 8 December 15/14 30-40-00 2 October 31/13
30-20-00 9 December 15/14 30-40-00 3 October 31/13
30-20-00 10 December 15/14 30-40-00 4 October 31/13
30-20-00 11 December 15/14 30-40-00 5 October 31/13
30-20-00 12 December 15/14 30-40-00 6 October 31/13
30-20-00 501 October 31/13 30-40-00 7 October 31/13
30-20-00 502 October 31/13 30-40-00 8 October 31/13
30-20-00 503 October 31/13 30-40-00 9 October 31/13
30-20-00 504 October 31/13 30-40-00 10 October 31/13
30-20-05 401 April 30/12 30-40-00 11 October 31/13
30-20-05 402 April 30/12 30-40-00 12 October 31/13
30-20-05 403 April 30/12 30-40-00 401 April 30/07
30-20-05 404 April 30/12 30-40-00 402 April 30/07
30-20-10 401 August 30/16 30-40-00 403 April 30/07
30-20-10 402 August 30/16 30-40-00 404 April 30/07
30-20-10 403 August 30/16 30-40-00 501 October 31/11
30-20-10 404 August 30/16 30-40-00 502 October 31/11
30-20-15 401 April 30/12 30-40-00 503 October 31/11
30-20-15 402 April 30/12 30-40-00 504 October 31/11
30-20-15 403 April 30/12 30-40-00 505 October 31/11
30-20-15 404 April 30/12 30-40-00 506 October 31/11

* Pages revised by Revision 35 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

** Pages added by Revision 35 Page 3
*** Pages deleted by Revision 35 September 30/22
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ATA PAGE DATE

30-40-05 401 February 28/10
30-40-05 402 February 28/10
30-40-05 403 February 28/10
30-40-05 404 February 28/10
30-40-05 405 February 28/10
30-40-05 406 February 28/10
30-40-05 407 February 28/10
30-40-05 408 February 28/10
30-41-00 1 November 30/08
30-41-00 2 November 30/08
30-41-00 3 November 30/08
30-41-00 4 November 30/08
30-41-00 5 November 30/08
30-41-00 6 November 30/08
30-41-00 7 November 30/08
30-41-00 8 November 30/08
30-41-00 501 November 30/08
30-41-00 502 November 30/08
30-41-00 503 November 30/08
30-41-00 504 November 30/08
30-41-00 505 November 30/08
30-41-00 506 November 30/08
30-41-00 507 November 30/08
30-41-00 508 November 30/08
30-41-00 509 November 30/08
30-41-00 510 November 30/08
30-41-05 401 April 30/12
30-41-05 402 April 30/12
30-41-05 403 April 30/12
30-41-05 404 April 30/12
30-41-05 405 April 30/12
30-41-05 406 April 30/12
30-41-10 401 November 30/08
30-41-10 402 November 30/08
30-41-10 403 November 30/08
30-41-10 404 November 30/08
30-41-10 501 November 30/08
30-41-10 502 November 30/08
30-41-10 503 November 30/08
30-41-10 504 November 30/08
30-41-10 601 November 30/08
30-41-10 602 November 30/08

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES * Pages revised by Revision 35

Page 4 ** Pages added by Revision 35
September 30/22 *** Pages deleted by Revision 35
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CHAPTER 30 - ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER/
SECTION TITLE PAGE

30-00-00 ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION

System Description 1
General 1
Subsystems 1
Subsystem Details 1
Inspection / Check 601
Ice and Rain Protection System — Visual Inspection 601

30-10-00 AIRFOIL DE-ICING SYSTEM

System Description 1
General 1
Component Location 1
Details 3
Operational Summary 4
Removal / Installation 401
Bleed Air Check Valve — Removal / Installation 401
Adjustment / Test 501
Airfoil De-icing System — Functional Test 501
Airfoil De-icing System — Leakage Test (With Engine Operating) 507
Windshield Icing Detection Light — Operational Test 510
Bleed Air Check Valve — Operational Check 513

30-10-05 DE-ICING TIMERS

Removal / Installation 401
De-icing Timers — Removal / Installation 401

30-10-10 ICE DETECTORS

Fault Isolation 101
(OBSERVED) – EJECTOR FLOW CONTROL VALVE HEATER BLANKET
NOT HEATING 101
Removal / Installation 401
Ice Detectors — Removal / Installation 401
Adjustment / Test 501
Ejector Flow Control Valve Heater Blanket — Test 501
Ice Detectors — Functional Test 506

30-10-15 PRESSURE REGULATOR

Removal / Installation 401
Pressure Regulator — Removal / Installation 401
Adjustment / Test 501
Pressure Regulator — Adjustment / Test 501

30-CONTENTS
Page 1
September 30/22
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CHAPTER/
SECTION TITLE PAGE

30-10-20 EJECTOR FLOW CONTROL VALVES

Removal / Installation 401
Ejector Flow Control Valves — Removal / Installation 401

30-10-25 EJECTOR FLOW CONTROL VALVE (EFCV) HEATER BLANKET

Removal / Installation 401
Ejector Flow Control Valve Heater Blanket — Removal / Installation 401

30-10-30 DE-ICING HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH

Removal / Installation 401
De-icing High-pressure Switch — Removal / Installation 401
Adjustment / Test 501
De-icing High-pressure Switch — Functional Test 501
High-pressure Switch — Operational Check 504

30-10-35 DE-ICING LOW PRESSURE SWITCH

Removal / Installation 401
De-icing Low-Pressure Switch — Removal / Installation (Aircraft 004 thru
Aircraft 100 Pre-Mod G2-20133) 401
Adjustment / Test 501
De-icing Low Pressure Switch — Functional Test (Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft
100 Pre-Mod G2-20133) 501

30-10-40 DE-ICER BOOTS

Servicing 301
De-icer Boots Surface Coating — Restore 301
Removal / Installation 401
Black De-icer Boots — Removal / Installation 401
Silver Estane De-icer Boots — Removal / Installation 416
Silver Urethane De-icer Boots — Removal / Installation 423
FASTboots — Removal / Installation 431
Inspection / Check 601
De-icer Boots — General Visual Inspection 601
Repair 801
De-icer Boots — Repair 801
Slat Conductive Edge Sealer — Repair 805

30-10-45 WINDSHIELD ICING DETECTION LIGHT

Removal / Installation 401
Windshield Icing Detection Light — Removal / Installation 401

30-10-70 DE-ICER PRESSURE (BOOT INFLATION) SWITCH

Removal / Installation 401
De-icer Pressure Switch — Removal / Installation 401

30-20-00 AIR INTAKES ANTI-ICING SYSTEM

System Description 1
General 1

30-CONTENTS
Page 2
September 30/22
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CHAPTER/
SECTION TITLE PAGE

Component Location 1
Details 2
Operational Summary 2
Adjustment / Test 501
Air Intakes Anti-icing System — Functional Test 501

30-20-05 ENGINE ANTI-ICING PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

Removal / Installation 401
Engine Anti-icing Pressure Transmitter — Removal / Installation 401

30-20-10 NACELLE PRESSURE REGULATING SHUTOFF VALVE (PRSOV)

Removal / Installation 401
Nacelle Pressure Regulating Shut-off Valve — Removal / Installation 401

30-20-15 NACELLE ANTI-ICE PRESSURE SENSE TUBE

Removal / Installation 401
Nacelle Anti-ice Pressure Sense Tube - Removal / Installation 401

30-20-20 NACELLE ANTI-ICE PRESSURE DUCT ASSEMBLY

Removal / Installation 401
Aft Nacelle Anti-ice Pressure Duct — Removal / Installation 401

30-20-21 FORWARD NACELLE ANTI-ICING PRESSURE DUCT

Removal / Installation 401
Forward Nacelle Anti-ice Pressure Duct — Removal / Installation 401

30-20-22 HIGH PRESSURE BLEED DUCT

Removal / Installation 401
High Pressure Bleed Duct — Removal / Installation 401

30-30-00 PROBE HEATING SYSTEM

System Description 1
General 1
Component Location 1
Details 2
Adjustment / Test 501
Probes Heating System — Functional Test 501

30-40-00 WINDOWS AND WINDSHIELD HEATING SYSTEM

System Description 1
General 1
Component Locations 1
Details 3
Removal / Installation 401
Windshield Heat Panel Terminal Cover — Removal / Installation 401
Adjustment / Test 501
Windshield Heating System — Functional Test 501

30-CONTENTS
Page 3
September 30/22
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CHAPTER/
SECTION TITLE PAGE

30-40-05 WINDSHIELD AND LEFT SIDE WINDOW TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS

Removal / Installation 401
Windshield and Side Window Temperature Controllers — Removal /
Installation 401

30-41-00 WINDSHIELD WIPER SYSTEM

System Description 1
General 1
Component Location 1
Details 1
Operational Summary 2
Adjustment / Test 501
Windshield Wipers System — Functional Test / Adjustment 501

30-41-05 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Removal / Installation 401
Wiper Blade — Removal / Installation 401
Windshield Wiper Arm — Removal / Installation 403

30-41-10 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR CONVERTER

Removal / Installation 401
Windshield Wiper Motor Converter — Removal / Installation 401
Adjustment / Test 501
Windshield Wiper Motor — Functional Test 501
Inspection / Check 601
Windshield Wiper Motor / Wipers — Visual Inspection 601

30-CONTENTS
Page 4
September 30/22
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION — SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. General
A. Description
Ice and rain systems are used to protect the aircraft and aid the air crew when operating in ice and
rain conditions.
Ice detection is provided by ice detectors, located on both sides of the forward fuselage, FS 162.20
(4120 mm) which detects the presence of icing conditions and provides signals to the Engine
Indicating and Crew Alerting System (EICAS) through the Stall Protection and Q-Feel Computer
(SPQC). In addition, a windshield icing detection light, located on the glareshield, glows red color on
right windshield to recognize ice accumulation on windshield at night.
2. Subsystems
• Airfoil De-icing System, 30-10-00, System Description
• Air Intakes Anti-icing System, 30-20-00, System Description
• Probe Heating System, 30-30-00, System Description
• Windows and Windshield Heating System, 30-40-00, System Description
• Windshield Wiper System, 30-41-00, System Description
3. Subsystem Details
A. Airfoil De-icing System
De-icing of wing and horizontal stabilizer leading edge is accomplished by pneumatically inflated
boots. The system is controlled by the DE-ICE WING & TAIL switch located on the overhead panel.
Aerodynamic profile of the airfoils is maintained by vacuum which evacuates the boots when they
are not in operation and holds them firmly against the leading edges. Four caution messages on the
EICAS indicate failure in the system. See Figures 1 and 2.
B. Air Intakes Anti-icing System
Anti-icing of engine nacelle inlets is accomplished by engine bleed air, distributed inside the leading
edges through swirl tubes. Inlet P2/T to probes are electrically heated. Nacelle and probe anti-icing
is controlled by the ANTI-ICE ENGINE PROBE AND NACELLE L and R, push-button switches
located on the overhead panel. When the engine bleed pressure is insufficient, a caution message
is displayed on EICAS.
C. Probes Heating System
Anti-icing for the pitot probes, static ports, Total Air Temperature (TAT) probe and Angle of Attack
(AOA) probe is provided by electrical heaters and controlled by a HEAT PROBES switch located on
the overhead panel. Three caution messages on the EICAS indicate failure in these systems.
D. Windows and Windshield Heating System
Windshield anti-icing is provided by electrical heating elements installed between the transparent
layers of the windshields. Electrical power to the elements is controlled by the HEAT W/S L and R
switches located on the overhead panel. Constant windshield temperature is maintained
automatically by regulating the electrical power to the elements. A W/S HEAT TEST push-button
located on the overhead panel tests the system. Two caution messages displayed on EICAS
indicate failure in the system.

30-00-00
Page 1
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

E. Windshield Wiper System

Two speed electrically operated windshield wipers remove the rain from the windshields. The wipers
are controlled by the L and R WINDSHIELD WIPERS selector switches located on the overhead
panel.

Ice and Rain Protection Systems - Overview

Figure 1 (Sheet 1 of 2)

30-00-00
Page 2
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Ice and Rain Protection Systems - Overview

Figure 1 (Sheet 2 of 2)

30-00-00
Page 3
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Ice and Rain Protection System - Controls and Displays

Figure 2

30-00-00
Page 4
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION — INSPECTION / CHECK

1. Ice and Rain Protection System — Visual Inspection
NOTE: This procedure applies to Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 135 Pre-SB 200-05-280.
A. Preparation
(1) References
• Lower Engine Access Cowling - Opening, 12-71-00, Maintenance Practices
• Lower Engine Access Cowling - Closing, 12-71-00, Maintenance Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
NOTE: This procedure applies to the pneumatic and electrical components of the airfoil
de-icing system, engine / nacelle anti-ice system, pitot and static system, windshield
heating system and windshield wiper system.
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Remove the following access panels (see Figure 601):

221CZ 223CZ 311AL

131FB 132GB 221BZ
223BZ

(c) Open access door 310AB. See Figure 601.

(d) Open upper and lower cowl doors See Lower Engine Access Cowling - Opening,
12-71-00, Maintenance Practices.
B. Inspection
NOTE: A general visual inspection is an inspection for obvious unsatisfactory conditions or
discrepancies.
(1) Perform general visual inspection on ice and rain protection system as follows:
(a) Inspect airfoil de-icing system components for physical condition and security. See
Figure 602, Figure 603 and Figure 604.
(b) Inspect air intakes anti-icing system components for physical condition and security.
See Figure 605.
(c) Inspect probes heating system components for physical condition and security. See
Figure 606.
(d) Inspect windows and windshield heating system components for physical condition and
security. See Figure 607.
(e) Inspect windshield wiper system components for physical condition and security. See
Figure 608.
C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.

30-00-00
Page 601
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(2) Close engine cowl doors. See Lower Engine Access Cowling - Opening, 12-71-00,
Maintenance Practices.
(3) Close access door opened in Step 1.A.(2)(c).
(4) Install access panels removed in Step 1.A.(2)(b).
(5) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-00-00
Page 602
October 31/13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Access Panels
Figure 601

30-00-00
Page 603
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System

Figure 602 (Sheet 1 of 7)

30-00-00
Page 604
October 31/13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System

Figure 602 (Sheet 2 of 7)

30-00-00
Page 605
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System

Figure 602 (Sheet 3 of 7)

30-00-00
Page 606
October 31/13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System

Figure 602 (Sheet 4 of 7)

30-00-00
Page 607
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System

Figure 602 (Sheet 5 of 7)

30-00-00
Page 608
October 31/13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System

Figure 602 (Sheet 6 of 7)

30-00-00
Page 609
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System

Figure 602 (Sheet 7 of 7)

30-00-00
Page 610
October 31/13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System

Figure 603

30-00-00
Page 611
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System

Figure 604

30-00-00
Page 612
October 31/13
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Air Intakes Anti-icing System

Figure 605

30-00-00
Page 613
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Probes Heating System

Figure 606

30-00-00
Page 614
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Windows and Windshield Heating System

Figure 607

30-00-00
Page 615
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Windshield Wiper System

Figure 608

30-00-00
Page 616
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AIRFOIL DE-ICING SYSTEM — ADJUSTMENT / TEST

1. Airfoil De-icing System — Functional Test
A. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
External air source, regulated, 0 - 100 psig ....................................................................... Standard
(1) Reference(s)
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• EICAS Activation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices
• EICAS Deactivation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices
• Engine Start, 71-00-00, Adjustment / Test
• Engine Shutdown, 71-00-00, Adjustment / Test
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Ensure the following Circuit Breakers (CB) are depressed:

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ICE DET L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ICE DET R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
SURFACE DE-ICE ALT Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
SURFACE DE-ICE NORM Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
GEAR L Cockpit overhead GROUND CONTROL
GEAR R Cockpit overhead GROUND CONTROL

(c) Apply electrical power to aircraft.

(d) Activate EICAS. See EICAS Activation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices.
B. Procedure
NOTE: The following procedures are provided to test the airfoil de-icing system:
• 1.B1. provides procedure to test airfoil de-icing system with engines running
• 1.B2. provides procedure to test airfoil de-icing system using external air source

30-10-00
Page 501
July 15/18
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

B1. Airfoil De-icing System With Engines Running

WARNING: THE ICE DETECTOR PROBE AND STRUT GET VERY HOT WHEN THE HEATERS
ARE ON. TAKE CARE NOT TO TOUCH STRUT OR PROBE WHEN HEATERS ARE
ON. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND
DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
CAUTION: PRESSING DE-ICE TEST SWITCH FOR MORE THAN 5 SECONDS MAY CAUSE
HEATING BLANKET TO BURN OUT. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
REMOVE ALL COVERS AND PROTECTIVE CAPS AND PLUGS FROM AIRFRAME
MOUNTED PROBES BEFORE STARTING ENGINES. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
DO NOT OPERATE WING AND TAIL DE-ICING SYSTEM AT AMBIENT
TEMPERATURES BELOW -40°F TO AVOID CRACKING ON BOOTS.
NOTE: This procedure is not applicable on Aircraft 04 thru Aircraft 100. The low pressure switch
was removed on these aircraft per SB 247.
(1) Start right engine and operate generator. See Engine Start, 71-00-00, Adjustment / Test.
(2) Momentarily press DE-ICE TEST switch on cockpit overhead panel and verify the following:
(a) Switch light comes on for as long as pressed.
NOTE: If light of DE-ICE TEST switch is not lit while pressed, check each electrical
blanket of ejector flow control valve for malfunction.
(b) L ICE DETECT TEST OK (green) and R ICE DETECT TEST OK (green) messages are
displayed on EICAS for about 10 seconds.
NOTE: If EICAS messages are not displayed, check each ice detector for
malfunction.
(3) Simulate aircraft in air mode by pulling GEAR L and GEAR R circuit breakers.
(4) Repeat Step 1.B1.(2).
(5) Pull ICE DET R circuit breaker on cockpit overhead panel.
(6) Verify R ICE DETECT FAIL (amber) message is displayed on EICAS after 5 seconds.
(7) Depress ICE DET R circuit breaker and verify R ICE DETECT FAIL (amber) message is not
displayed on EICAS.
(8) Repeat Step 1.B1.(2) and perform the following:
(a) While L ICE DETECT TEST OK (green) and R ICE DETECT TEST OK (green)
messages are displayed on EICAS, pull ICE DET R circuit breaker.
(b) Verify R ICE DETECT FAIL (amber) message is displayed on EICAS after L ICE
DETECT TEST OK (green) and R ICE DETECT TEST OK (green) messages go off.
(c) Depress ICE DET R circuit breaker and verify R ICE DETECT FAIL (amber) message
is not displayed on EICAS.
(9) Pull ICE DET L circuit breaker on cockpit overhead panel.
(10) Verify L ICE DETECT FAIL (amber) message is displayed on EICAS after 5 seconds.

30-10-00
Page 502
July 15/18
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(11) Depress ICE DET L circuit breaker and verify L ICE DETECT FAIL (amber) message is not
displayed on EICAS.
(12) Repeat Step 1.B1.(2) and perform the following:
(a) While L ICE DETECT TEST OK (green) and R ICE DETECT TEST OK (green)
messages are displayed on EICAS, pull ICE DET L circuit breaker.
(b) Verify L ICE DETECT FAIL (amber) message is displayed on EICAS after L ICE
DETECT TEST OK (green) and R ICE DETECT TEST OK (green) messages go off.
(c) Depress ICE DET L circuit breaker and verify L ICE DETECT FAIL (amber) message is
not displayed on EICAS.
WARNING: MANUAL MANIPULATION OF WOW SYSTEM IS REQUIRED TO
ACCOMPLISH THIS MAINTENANCE TASK. FAILURE TO RETURN WOW
SYSTEM TO NORMAL CONFIGURATION UPON COMPLETION OF THIS
MAINTENANCE TASK CAN CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO AIRCRAFT OR
INJURY TO PERSONNEL.
(13) Depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.B1.(3).
(14) Advance right engine to 65% N1.
(15) Select DE ICE WING & TAIL switch on cockpit overhead switch panel to NORM position and
verify the following:
(a) Boots inflation, first 6 seconds for slats, then 6 seconds for fixed inboard leading edges
and Krueger flaps and then 6 seconds for horizontal stabilizer.
(b) After boots inflation period, system shall dwell for 42 seconds then repeat inflation cycle
every 1 minute.
(c) Allow de-icing system to cycle for 3 minutes and verify DE-ICE SYS (amber) message
is not displayed on EICAS.
(16) Select DE ICE WING & TAIL switch to OFF position.
(17) Select DE ICE WING & TAIL switch to ALT position and verify the following:
(a) Boots inflation, first 6 seconds for slats, then 6 seconds for fixed inboard leading edges
and Krueger flaps and then 6 seconds for horizontal stabilizer.
(b) After boots inflation period, system shall dwell for forty two seconds then repeat
inflation cycle every 1 minute.
(c) Allow de-icing system to cycle for 3 minutes and verify DE-ICE SYS (amber) message
is not displayed on EICAS.
(18) Select DE ICE WING & TAIL switch to OFF position.
(19) Shut down right engine. See Engine Shutdown, 71-00-00, Adjustment / Test.
(20) Start and operate left engine. See Engine Start, 71-00-00, Adjustment / Test.
(21) Repeat Step 1.B1.(14) thru Step 1.B1.(19) for left engine.
B2. Airfoil De-icing System Using External Air Source
NOTE: Step 1.B2.(4) thru Step 1.B2.(15) is only applicable to Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 100 Pre-SB
200-30-247. All other steps are for all other aircraft.
For this procedure, the 535P relay, located in right cockpit relay box, must be removed and

30-10-00
Page 503
July 15/18
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

a jumper installed between pins D1 and D2.

For this procedure use an air pressure source of 30 - 80 psig with a 3 pound per minute
airflow capability.
(1) Remove access panel 311AL. See Figure 501.
(2) Remove cap from ground test pressure connection and connect external air pressure source.
NOTE: The de-ice system ground test pressure connection is located on the pressure
regulator inlet port T-fitting.
(3) With external air source turned off, select the following switches on overhead panel to ON
position:
• POWER EXT
• AVIONICS L
• AVIONICS R
(4) Select ANTI ICE ENGINE PROBE & NACELLE L switch (161H) to on (ENGINE ANTI-ICE
light is on).
(5) Verify DE ICE LOW/HI PRESS (amber) message is displayed on the EICAS after about 4
seconds.
(6) Select ANTI ICE ENGINE PROBE & NACELLE L switch to off.
(7) Verify message DE ICE LOW/HI PRESS (amber) is not displayed on EICAS.
(8) Repeat Step 1.B2.(4) thru Step 1.B2.(7) with ANTI ICE ENGINE PROBE & NACELLE R
switch (162H).
(9) Select ANTI ICE ENGINE PROBE & NACELLE L switch to on.
(10) Verify DE ICE LOW/HI PRESS (amber) message is displayed on EICAS after about 4
seconds.
(11) Turn on external air source and slowly increase pressure to 35 psig.
(12) Verify DE ICE LOW/HI PRESS (amber) message no longer displays on EICAS as soon as
inlet pressure to pressure regulator is higher than 16 psig.
(13) Turn off external air source.
(14) Select ANTI ICE ENGINE PROBE & NACELLE L switch to off.
(15) Repeat Step 1.B2.(9) thru Step 1.B2.(14) with ANTI ICE ENGINE PROBE & NACELLE R
switch.
(16) Turn on external air source and stabilize pressure at 35 psig for the following continuous cycle
checks:
(a) Verify the following Circuit Breakers (CB) are depressed:

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ICE DET L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ICE DET R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
SURFACE DE-ICE ALT Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
SURFACE DE-ICE NORM Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

30-10-00
Page 504
July 15/18
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(b) Set DE ICE WING & TAIL switch (153H) to NORM.

(c) Observe boots start inflating.
NOTE: Slats leading edge de-ice boots will inflate as soon as switch is set to NORM
and remain inflated for 6 seconds, with inflation of inboard leading edge and
Kruger flaps de-ice boots and horizontal stabilizer boots for 6 seconds each
respectively immediately following. After boots inflation period, system will
pause for 42 seconds and repeat inflation cycles every 1 minute.
(d) Leave system cycling for 3 minutes. Verify no messages from de-icing system are
displayed on EICAS.
NOTE: May receive DE ICE LOW/HI PRESS (amber) message when air source
does not procedure the correct volume of air.
(e) Select DE ICE WING & TAIL switch to off.
(17) Install access panel removed in Step 1.B2.(1).
C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
NOTE: Jumper between relay 535P, pins D1 and D2, must be removed and the relay
installed.
(2) Deactivate EICAS. See EICAS Deactivation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices.
(3) Remove electrical power from aircraft.
(4) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-00
Page 505
July 15/18
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

310AB

311AL

DETAIL A

69768J00

Empennage Access Panels

Figure 501

30-10-00
Page 506
July 15/18
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2. Airfoil De-icing System — Leakage Test (With Engine Operating)

A. Preparation
CONSUMABLES

Soap solution ...................................................................................................................... Standard

(1) Reference(s)
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Engine Start, 71-00-00, Adjustment / Test
• Engine Shutdown, 71-00-00, Adjustment / Test
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Apply electrical power to aircraft.
(c) Remove access panel 311AL. See Figure 501.
CAUTION: REMOVE ALL COVERS AND PROTECTIVE CAPS AND PLUGS FROM
AIRFRAME MOUNTED PROBES BEFORE STARTING ENGINES.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
DO NOT OPERATE WING AND TAIL DE-ICING SYSTEM AT AMBIENT
TEMPERATURES BELOW -40°F TO AVOID CRACKING ON THE
BOOTS.
(d) Start right engine. See Engine Start, 71-00-00, Adjustment / Test.
B. Procedure
NOTE: The following procedure is used in conjunction with Figure 502.
(1) Operate right engine at 65% N1 while left engine is shutdown.
(2) Using soap solution, check for leakage on the following joints (no leakage is allowed):
(a) Right check valve inlet and outlet lines.
(b) Pressure regulator inlet and outlet lines.
(c) On Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 100 Pre-SB 200-30-247, low-pressure switch inlet and
outlet lines.
(3) Start left engine. See Engine Start, 71-00-00, Adjustment / Test.
(4) Operate left engine at 65% N1 while right engine is operating.
(5) Using soap solution, check for leakage on joints of left check valve inlet and outlet lines. No
leakage is allowed.
C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Shut down left and right engines. See Engine Shutdown, 71-00-00, Adjustment / Test.
(3) Remove electrical power from aircraft.
(4) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(5) Install access panel removed in Step 2.A.(2)(c).

30-10-00
Page 507
July 15/18
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(6) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-00
Page 508
July 15/18
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

REGULATED
BLEED AIR
RIGHT ENGINE
TO HORIZONTAL
BLEED AIR
STABILIZER

CHECK
VALVE
EXTERNAL AIR
CONNECTION
LEFT ENGINE
WATER BLEED AIR
SEPARATOR

CHECK
VALVE
LOW
PRESSURE
SWITCH

PRESSURE
REGULATOR EJECTOR FLOW
CONTROL VALVE

REGULATED
BLEED AIR PRESSURE
TO FORWARD MONITORING
FUSELAGE CONNECTION

DETAIL A
77961J01

Airfoil De-icing System

Figure 502

30-10-00
Page 509
July 15/18
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3. Windshield Icing Detection Light — Operational Test

A. Preparation
(1) Reference(s)
• External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices
• External Electrical Power - Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance
Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Apply electrical power to aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft,
12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(c) Ensure the following Circuit Breakers (CB) are pulled:

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

L INSTR OH/CONS Cockpit overhead LTS INTERIOR
R INSTR Cockpit overhead LTS INTERIOR

(d) Ensure COCKPIT LIGHTS MASTER switch is selected to off position.

B. Procedure
NOTE: The following procedure is used in conjunction with Figure 503.
(1) Depress L INSTR OH/CONS circuit breaker on overhead panel.
(2) Select COCKPIT LIGHTS MASTER switch to on position.
(3) Ensure windshield icing detection light comes on.
(4) Pull L INSTR OH/CONS circuit breaker on overhead panel.
(5) Ensure windshield icing detection light goes off.
(6) Depress R INSTR circuit breaker on overhead panel.
(7) Ensure windshield icing detection light comes on.
(8) Pull R INSTR circuit breaker on overhead panel.
(9) Ensure windshield icing detection light goes off.
(10) Depress both L INSTR OH/CONS and R INSTR circuit breakers.
(11) Ensure windshield icing detection light comes on.
(12) Select COCKPIT LIGHTS MASTER switch to off position.
(13) Ensure windshield icing detection light goes off.
C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove electrical power from aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Disconnection from
Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.

30-10-00
Page 510
July 15/18
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(3) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-00
Page 511
July 15/18
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

RUBBER SLEEVE
REF

WINDSHIELD
ICING DETECTION
LIGHT

DETAIL A
ON GLARESHIELD, ROTATED 45

77960J00

Airfoil De-icing System

Figure 503

30-10-00
Page 512
July 15/18
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4. Bleed Air Check Valve — Operational Check

A. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

External air source, regulated, 0 - 100 psi ......................................................................... Standard

Flow meter ............................................................................................. GSE3520450 or equivalent
(1) Reference(s)
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Bleed Air Check Valve - Removal / Installation, 30-10-00, Removal / Installation or Code
301036
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Remove bleed air check valve. See Bleed Air Check Valve - Removal / Installation,
30-10-00, Removal / Installation or Code 301036.
B. Procedure
(1) Connect external air source to outlet of bleed air check valve.
NOTE: Connect air source to check valve opposite to flow direction.
(2) Connect inlet of check valve to flow meter.
(3) Apply 20 ±1 psig of external air to check valve.
(4) Verify flow does not exceed 1.0 scfm.
(5) Remove external air source and flow meter from check valve.
C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Install bleed air check valve. See Bleed Air Check Valve - Removal / Installation, 30-10-00,
Removal / Installation or Code 301036.
(3) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-00
Page 513
July 15/18
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-10-00
Page 514
July 15/18
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AIRFOIL DE-ICING SYSTEM — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. Bleed Air Check Valve — Removal / Installation
A. General
Removal and installation of right bleed air check valve is identical to left bleed air check valve,
except where noted. The left and right bleed air check valves are located at FS 582 (14,783 mm).
B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
(1) Reference
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Remove access panel 311AL. See Figure 401.
C. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 402.
(1) Disconnect B-nuts (1) from check valve (2).
(2) Remove check valve (2) from aircraft.
(3) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
D. Installation
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 402.
(1) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(2) Position check valve (2) in place on ducts with flow arrow pointing inboard and with word UP,
on outboard side of valve, at top (12 o’clock position).
(3) Connect B-nuts (1) securing check valve (2).
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Install access panel removed in Step 1.B.(2)(b).
(3) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-00
Page 401
October 15/09
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

310AB

311AL

DETAIL A

69768J00

Empennage Access
Figure 401

30-10-00
Page 402
October 15/09
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1
FL
OW

SEE DETAIL A
FS
582.0

DETAIL B

SEE DETAIL B

SEE DETAIL B

DETAIL A 77838J00

Bleed Air Check Valve

Figure 402

30-10-00
Page 403
October 15/09
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-10-00
Page 404
October 15/09
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AIRFOIL DE-ICING SYSTEM — SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. General
A. Description
Airfoil de-icing, utilizing engine bleed air, provides air pressure and vacuum to the de-icing boots.
The boots are fabric reinforced rubber sheets, containing built-in inflatable tubes, installed on the
leading edges of the wings (fixed and slatted) and horizontal stabilizer. See Figure 2 and Figure 3.
2. Component Location

FIGURE 1 QTY PER

NOMENCLATURE LOCATION
SHEET A/C
Circuit breaker (SURFACE 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
DE-ICE NORM) - 151H
Circuit breaker (SURFACE 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
DE-ICE ALT) - 150H
Circuit breaker (ICE DET L) - 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
351H
Circuit breaker (ICE DET R) - 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
352H
Switch (DE-ICE TEST) - 215H 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
Switch (DE-ICE WING and 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
TAIL) - 153H
Light (windshield icing 1 1 Flight compartment, glareshield
detection) - 196L
Relay - 442H 2 1 Flight compartment, right cockpit relay
box
Relay - 322H (1) 2 1 Flight compartment, right cockpit relay
box
Relay (Time Delay) - 478H 2 1 Flight compartment, right cockpit relay
box
Relay - 342H 2 1 Flight compartment, right cockpit relay
box
Relay - 350H 2 1 Flight compartment, right cockpit relay
box
(1)
On Aircraft 004 and Aircraft 013 thru Aircraft 999.

FIGURE 1 QTY PER

NOMENCLATURE LOCATION
SHEET A/C
Resistor - 444H 2 1 Flight compartment, right cockpit relay
box

30-10-00
Page 1
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FIGURE 1 QTY PER

NOMENCLATURE LOCATION
SHEET A/C
Resistor - 447H 2 1 Flight compartment, right cockpit relay
box
Relay - 358H 2 1 Flight compartment, right cockpit relay
box
Relay - 359H 2 1 Flight compartment, right cockpit relay
box
Relay - 360H 2 1 Flight compartment, right cockpit relay
box
Ice detector - left 353H, right 3 2 Forward fuselage, FS 162.0 (4120.0
354H mm)
Relay - 341H 3 1 Flight compartment, left cockpit relay
box
Relay - 315H 3 1 Flight compartment, left cockpit relay
box
Relay - 311H 3 1 Flight compartment, left cockpit relay
box
Relay - 307H 3 1 Flight compartment, left cockpit relay
box
Relay - 281H 3 1 Flight compartment, left cockpit relay
box
Resistor - 443H 3 1 Flight compartment, left cockpit relay
box
Timer (main) - 212H 4 1 Aft fuselage, left side between FS
633.34 (16087 mm) and FS 677.83
(17217 mm), behind access door
310AB
Timer (alternate) - 156H 4 1 Aft fuselage, left side between FS
633.34 (16087 mm) and FS 677.83
(17217 mm), behind access door
310AB

FIGURE 1 QTY PER

NOMENCLATURE LOCATION
SHEET A/C
High-pressure switch - 157H 6 1 Forward fuselage, FS 365.90 (9294
mm), behind access panel 132FB
EFCV (inbd fixed LE and 6 1 Forward fuselage, FS 365.90 (9294
krueger flap boot de-icer mm), behind access panel 131FB and
control) - 346H 132FB

30-10-00
Page 2
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FIGURE 1 QTY PER

NOMENCLATURE LOCATION
SHEET A/C
Heater blanket - 357H 6 1 On EFCV, 346H
EFCV (slats boot de-icer 6 1 Forward fuselage, FS 365.90 (9294
control) - 345H mm), behind access panel 132HB
Heater blanket - 356H 6 1 On EFCV, 345H
Pressure switch (slat boots 6 1 Forward fuselage, FS 365.90 (9294
inflation) - 213H mm), behind access panel 132HB
EFCV (horizontal stabilizer 7 1 Aft fuselage, FS 582.00 (14783 mm),
boot de-icer control) - 344H behind access panel 311AL
Heater blanket - 355H 7 1 On EFCV, 344H
Low-pressure switch - 155H 8 1 Aft fuselage, FS 582.00 (14783 mm),
(1) behind access panel 311AL
Pressure regulator 8 1 Aft fuselage, FS 582.00 (14783 mm),
behind access panel 311AL
Pressure switch (horizontal 9 1 Aft fuselage, FS 582.00 (14783 mm),
stabilizer boots inflation) behind access panel 311AL
-214H
Pressure switch (L krueger 10 1 Left wing, inboard of krueger
boot inflation) - 481H (2)
Pressure switch (R krueger 11 1 Right wing, inboard of krueger
boot inflation) - 340H
(1)
On Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 100 Pre-SB 200-30-247.
(2)
On Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 087 Pre-SB 200-30-221

3. Details
A. Low-pressure Bleed Air
Low-pressure bleed air flows from each engine to its respective check valve which prevents back
flow to the engines, thus enabling the system to operate with one engine. Air flows from the check
valves to a pressure regulator, incorporating a relief valve through a water separator which removes
free water existing in the airflow. Three ejector flow control valves supply air pressure at 18 psi. In
addition, the ejectors use the regulated air pressure to create vacuum. The ejectors are wrapped
with thermostatically controlled electrical heating blankets, to prevent ice formation. Contacts on low
pressure switch open on increasing pressure at 17.0 psig maximum at ambient temperatures of ≥
70°F (21°C). 17.5 psig maximum at ambient temperature < 70°F (21°C). Contacts close on
decreasing pressure of 15.0 ± 0.5 psig. See Figure 4.
B. Ejector Flow Control Valve (EFCV)
One EFCV is connected to the fixed wing leading edges and the Krueger flap boots, one to the slats
leading edge boots and one to the horizontal stabilizer boots. Operation of the valves is controlled
by the normal or alternate timer to supply the boot inflation pressure or vacuum according to a fixed
schedule. All boots are vacuum supplied when the system is off. When the system is on, the slat
leading edge boots receive pressure for 6 seconds, then the fixed wing leading edges and the

30-10-00
Page 3
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Krueger edge boots receive pressure for 6 seconds and then the horizontal stabilizer boots receives
pressure for 6 seconds. Each set of boots receives vacuum when the others are receiving pressure.
After the inflation cycle, all boots receive vacuum for 42 seconds and then the cycle starts again
with wing inflation. Total cycle time is 60 seconds. At a de-energized level, the primary flow
consumption for vacuum generation is 2.0 SCFM maximum at 19 psig with inlet pressure of 70°F
(21° C). Secondary deflation flow should be 5 SCFM minimum from de-icer port to overboard port
at 10 psig. De-icer port pressure with no generated vacuum. At an energized level, inflation flow is
33 SCFM minimum at 19 psig. Inlet pressure at 70°F (21°C). Vacuum generated inlet pressure
should be at 19 psig.
C. High-pressure Switch
A high-pressure switch activates at a pressure between the nominal regulated pressure and the
relief valve setting. On Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 100 Pre-SB 200-30-247, a low-pressure switch
activates when there is insufficient pressure. The activation of either switch causes DE-ICE LOW /
HI PRESS caution message on the Engine Indication and Crew Alerting System (EICAS). The
actuation pressure on the high-pressure switch on the increasing level is 23.0 ± 1.0 psig. On the
decreasing level, pressure is 19.0 psig minimum
On Aircraft 101 thru Aircraft 999, the low-pressure switch is removed from the aircraft.
D. Inflation Switches
Four inflation switches (one in slat de-icer line, one in horizontal stabilizer de-icer line and two in
fixed inboard / Krueger flap de-icer line) sense inflation pressure during system operation. The
activation of switches initiates monitoring circuit in main / alternate timer to indicate normal
operation.
On Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 087 Post SB 200-30-221 and Aircraft 088 thru Aircraft 999, the left
Krueger inflation pressure switch is removed from the aircraft.
The normal and alternate timers are identical electronic units used for normal and backup, mounted
together in the aft fuselage, above the equipment compartment door. The timers control operation of
the ejector valves according to a fixed schedule when activated by the DE-ICE WING & TAIL switch.
Inflation switches close at 15 ± 1 psi and open at 12.5 ± 1.5 psi.
E. Ice Detectors
The ice detection function consists of two ice detectors. Each detector contains a sensor and
processing unit. Two detectors are installed for redundancy. The detector that detects ice sends the
detection signal. The output is fed through the Stall Protection / Q-feel Computer (SPQC) to the
EICAS.
The ice detector provides icing annunciation by counting ice accretion in 0.01 inch increments on
the ice detector probe and correlating these increments to ice accretion on the aircraft surfaces.
These increments are called correlation counts. ICING CONDITION is signalled after two counts,
0.020 inch ice accretion.
The SPQC monitors the ice detector status and signals the EICAS of failures, ICE DETECT FAlL
message.
4. Operational Summary
A. System Operation
Positioning the DE-ICE WING & TAIL switch to either NORM or ALT activates the main or alternate
timer, respectively. The timer controls the operation of the ejector flow control valve so that a 6
second pressure pulse is sent to the slats leading edge boots, then a 6 second pressure pulse is
sent to the fixed wing leading edges and the Krueger edge boots and then a 6 second pulse is sent

30-10-00
Page 4
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

to the horizontal stabilizer boots. Boots are under vacuum at all times except when a pressure pulse
is sent. Inflation of the boots breaks off accumulated ice which is then removed by the airstream.
After the tail boots have received 6 seconds of pressure pulse, the system waits with vacuum to all
boots for 42 seconds until the cycle starts again. If the switch is set to off in midcycle, the inflation
cycle is completed and then the timer resets, so that when it is reset to NORM or ALT, the cycle
restarts with wing boot inflation.
Normal system operation has no indication. Four caution messages may appear on the EICAS
display to indicate system failure malfunction.
With COCKPIT LIGHTS MASTER switch selected to ON position, the windshield icing detection
light comes on steadily.
B. Controls
The DE-ICE WING & TAIL switch, located on the overhead panel, controls the operation of the wing
and horizontal stabilizer deicer boots. See Figure 5.
The switch has the following three positions:
• OFF - The system is off
• NORM - The system operates according to timer program, a total of 18 seconds of inflation,
followed by 42 seconds of vacuum before next cycle
• ALT - The system operates as in NORM but is controlled by the alternate timer
The SYSTEM / WARN TEST DE-ICE switch, on the overhead panel tests the heating blankets on
the ejector flow control valves and performs a Built-in Test (BIT) of the ice detectors. If the test is
successful on the heating blankets, the DE-ICE push-button switch comes on. If the test on the
heating blankets fail, the DE-ICE push-button switch does not come on. If the BIT of the ice
detectors is successful, the L/R ICE DETECT TEST OK message displays on EICAS for 10
seconds. If the BIT of the ice detectors fails, the L/R ICE DETECT FAIL message displays on
EICAS.
C. Displays
The Airframe Ice Protection System displays consist of the following caution messages and
advisory messages that are provided by EICAS. See Figure 5.
Caution Messages
• ICE CONDITION - Icing condition detected by left or right detectors while airborne
• DE-ICE SYS - Normal de-ice system malfunction
• DEI-CE SYS ALT - Alternate de-ice system malfunction
• ICE DETECT FAlL (L/R) - Ice detector malfunction
• DE-ICE LOW/HI PRESS - Overpressure or underpressure in the system
Advisory Messages
• ICE DETECT TEST OK (L/R) - Successful de-ice system test
• WINDSHIELD ICING DETECTION LIGHT - At night, ice is recognized with icing detection
light glowing red on the right windshield

30-10-00
Page 5
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System - Component Location

Figure 1 (Sheet 1 of 11)

30-10-00
Page 6
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System - Component Location

Figure 1 (Sheet 2 of 11)

30-10-00
Page 7
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System - Component Location

Figure 1 (Sheet 3 of 11)

30-10-00
Page 8
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

ALTERNATE (BACK-UP) TIMER

156H

MAIN TIMER
212H

DETAIL A

87234J00

Airfoil De-icing System - Component Location

Figure 1 (Sheet 4 of 11)

30-10-00
Page 9
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System - Component Location

Figure 1 (Sheet 5 of 11)

30-10-00
Page 10
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System - Component Location

Figure 1 (Sheet 6 of 11)

30-10-00
Page 11
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System - Component Location

Figure 1 (Sheet 7 of 11)

30-10-00
Page 12
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System - Component Location

Figure 1 (Sheet 8 of 11)

30-10-00
Page 13
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System - Component Location

Figure 1 (Sheet 9 of 11)

30-10-00
Page 14
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System - Component Location

Figure 1 (Sheet 10 of 11)

30-10-00
Page 15
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing System - Component Location

Figure 1 (Sheet 11 of 11)

30-10-00
Page 16
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing - Schematic Diagram ( Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 100 Pre-Mod G2-20133)
Figure 2

30-10-00
Page 17
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing - Schematic Diagram ( Aircraft 101 thru Aircraft 999 Post Mod G2-20133)
Figure 3

30-10-00
Page 18
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing - Block Diagram

Figure 4

30-10-00
Page 19
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Airfoil De-icing - Controls and Displays

Figure 5

30-10-00
Page 20
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DE-ICING TIMERS — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. De-icing Timers — Removal / Installation
A. General
The de-icing timers (main and alternate) are located in the left aft fuselage, between FS 633.34
(16087 mm) and FS 677.83 (17217 mm) behind access door 310AB. The alternate timer is forward
of the main de-icing timer.
The removal and installation procedure for both timers is identical; therefore, only one procedure is
given.
B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Circuit breaker safety clips ................................................................................................. Standard
Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
(1) References
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 301001
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Select DE-ICE WING & TAIL switch to OFF position.
(c) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

SURFACE DE-ICE ALT Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
SURFACE DE-ICE NORM Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

(d) Remove access door 310AB. See Figure 401.

C. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 402.
(1) Disconnect electrical connector (1) from timer (2).
(2) Install protective caps and plugs on all open electrical connections.
(3) Remove screws (3) and washers (4) attaching timer (2) to fuselage.
(4) Remove timer (2) from aircraft.
D. Installation
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 402.
(1) Position timer (2) in the fuselage.
(2) Install washers (4) and screws (3) attaching timer (2) to fuselage.
(3) Remove all protective caps and plugs from electrical connections.
(4) Connect electrical connector (1) to timer (2).

30-10-05
Page 401
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.B.(2)(c).
(3) Perform Airfoil - Functional Test. See Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00,
Adjustment / Test or Code 301001.
(4) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(5) Install access door removed in Step 1.B.(2)(d).
(6) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-05
Page 402
August 30/16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

310AB

311AL

DETAIL A

69768J00

Empennage Access
Figure 401

30-10-05
Page 403
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A
ALTERNATE TIMER
REF

MAIN TIMER
REF

4
3

1
FUSELAGE
REF

DETAIL A

87235J00

Airfoil De-icing Timers

Figure 402

30-10-05
Page 404
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ICE DETECTORS — ADJUSTMENT / TEST

1. Ejector Flow Control Valve Heater Blanket — Test
NOTE: This procedure applies to the following ejector flow control valve blankets:
• Horizontal stabilizer
• Krueger flaps
• Slats
A. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

Thermometer ....................................................................................................................... Standard

(1) Reference(s)
• External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices
• External Electrical Power - Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance
Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• EJECTOR FLOW CONTROL VALVE HEATER BLANKET NOT HEATING, 30-10-10,
Fault Isolation
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Ensure the following Circuit Breakers (CB) are depressed:

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ICE DET L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ICE DET R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
SURFACE DE-ICE ALT Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
SURFACE DE-ICE NORM Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
PITOT STATIC HEAT L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
PITOT STATIC HEAT R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
AOA PROBE HEAT L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
AOA PROBE HEAT R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
GEAR L Cockpit overhead GROUND CONTROL
GEAR R Cockpit overhead GROUND CONTROL
SPQC L Cockpit overhead STALL PROT
SPQC R Cockpit overhead STALL PROT

30-10-10
Page 501
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CAUTION: REMOVE COVERS AND / OR PROTECTIVE DEVICES FROM ICE

DETECTORS. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT.
(c) Remove protective covers from ice detectors, pitot-static probes, total air sensor and air
data sensor.
(d) Ensure DE ICE WING & TAIL switch on cockpit overhead panel is selected to OFF.
(e) Ensure HEAT PROBES switch on cockpit overhead panel is selected to AUTO.
(f) Remove access panels 311AL and 132HB as required. See Figure 501.
(g) Apply electrical power to aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft,
12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
B. Procedure
WARNING: THE ICE DETECTOR PROBE AND STRUT GET VERY HOT WHEN THE HEATERS
ARE ON. TAKE CARE NOT TO TOUCH THE STRUT OR PROBE WHEN HEATERS
ARE ON. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND
DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
(1) For Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 139, perform the following:
(a) Confirm ejector flow control valve heating blankets are securely attached to valves.
WARNING: EJECTOR FLOW CONTROL VALVES ARE HOT TO THE TOUCH. USE
CAUTION WHEN TOUCHING VALVE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL.
(b) Wait 60 seconds, then use thermometer or cautiously touch each ejector flow control
valve to verify ejector flow control valve heater blanket is heating.
(2) For Aircraft 140 and subsequent, perform the following:
(a) Confirm ejector flow control valve heating blankets are securely attached to valves.
(b) By touch, confirm each ejector flow control valve is at ambient temperature.
CAUTION: THE ANGLE OF ATTACK HEATERS ARE ALLOWED TO OPERATE FOR
ONLY 45 SECONDS WHILE IN AIR CONDITION. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
(c) Pull GEAR R circuit breaker to place right WOW switch in air mode.
(d) Wait 45 seconds, then depress GEAR R circuit breaker.
WARNING: EJECTOR FLOW CONTROL VALVES ARE HOT TO THE TOUCH. USE
CAUTION WHEN TOUCHING VALVE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL.
(e) Use thermometer or cautiously touch each ejector flow control valve to verify ejector
flow control valve heater blanket was heating.
(f) Wait 15 minutes and verify ejector flow control valves are at ambient temperature.
(g) Select HEAT PROBES switch to OVRD.
(h) Wait 45 seconds, then select HEAT PROBES switch to AUTO.
(i) Use thermometer or cautiously touch each ejector flow control valve to verify ejector
flow control valve heater blanket was heating.

30-10-10
Page 502
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove electrical power from aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Disconnection from
Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(3) If a heater blanket did not pass this test, perform EJECTOR FLOW CONTROL VALVE
HEATER BLANKET NOT HEATING, 30-10-10, Fault Isolation.
(4) Install access panels removed in Step 1.A.(2)(f).
(5) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-10
Page 503
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

310AB

311AL

DETAIL A

69768J00

Empennage Access
Figure 501 (Sheet 1 of 2)

30-10-10
Page 504
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

132HB
132KR
132EB
132DB

131BL

132FB

131AL

DETAIL A

68254J00

Lower Forward Fuselage Fairing Access Panels

Figure 501 (Sheet 2 of 2)

30-10-10
Page 505
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2. Ice Detectors — Functional Test

A. Preparation
CONSUMABLES
Freeze spray ............................................................................. Servisol Freeze IT 20 or equivalent
Water ................................................................................................................................... Standard
(1) References
• External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices
• External Electrical Power - Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance
Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• EICAS Activation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices
• EICAS Deactivation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices
• APU Engine Shutdown, 49-00-00, Adjustment / Test
• Airplane Flight Manual
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Ensure the following Circuit Breakers (CB) are depressed:

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ICE DET L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ICE DET R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
AOA PROBE HEAT R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

CAUTION: REMOVE COVERS AND / OR PROTECTIVE DEVICES FROM ICE

DETECTORS. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT.
(c) Remove protective covers from ice detectors.
B. Procedure
WARNING: MANUAL MANIPULATION OF WOW SYSTEM IS REQUIRED TO ACCOMPLISH
THIS MAINTENANCE TASK. FAILURE TO RETURN WOW SYSTEM TO NORMAL
CONFIGURATION UPON COMPLETION OF THIS MAINTENANCE TASK MAY
CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO AIRCRAFT OR INJURY TO PERSONNEL.
(1) Apply electrical power to aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft,
12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(2) Activate EICAS. See EICAS Activation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices.
(3) Start APU and verify APU generator is online. See Airplane Flight Manual (AFM).
(4) Pull GEAR R and GEAR L circuit breakers to simulate air mode.
(5) Select SYSTEM/WARN TEST DE-ICE TEST switch and verify L and R ICE DETECT TEST
OK messages are displayed on EICAS for approximately 10 seconds.
NOTE: This will check system prior to spray test to verify no system errors.

30-10-10
Page 506
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(6) Test each ice detector as follows:

(a) Preferred method
NOTE: The use of freeze spray and water spray to create a layer of ice on the probes
is the preferred method because in-service history has shown the alternate
method to be less effective and units were replaced without cause.
1 Spray ice detector probe with freeze spray followed by a mist of water.
2 Repeat Step 2.B.(6)(a)1 3 times to build up ice formation until ice detector heat
comes on as indicated by ice formation melting.
3 Verify ICE CONDITION message is displayed on EICAS.
4 Allow ice formation to melt and verify ICE CONDITION message is not displayed
on EICAS.
5 Repeat Step 2.B.(6)(a)1 thru Step 2.B.(6)(a)4 for opposite side probe.
(b) Alternate method
WARNING: PROBE TIP WILL GET EXTREMELY HOT. DO NOT HOLD TIP ANY
LONGER THAN NECESSARY TO TEST THE PROBE HEATING.
1 Using a dampened towel or rag, squeeze ice detector probe momentarily until
probe begins to get hot.
2 Verify ICE CONDITION message is momentarily displayed on EICAS.
3 Repeat Step 2.B.(6)(b)1 and Step 2.B.(6)(b)2 for opposite side probe.
NOTE: Should this method fail, before detector is suspect of failing, perform
Step 2.B.(6)(a). Do not replace probe should this squeeze method fail.
(7) Deactivate EICAS. See EICAS Deactivation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices.
C. Follow On
(1) Shut down APU. See APU Engine Shutdown, 49-00-00, Adjustment / Test or AFM.
(2) Remove electrical power from aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Disconnection from
Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(3) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
WARNING: MANUAL MANIPULATION OF WOW SYSTEM IS REQUIRED TO
ACCOMPLISH THIS MAINTENANCE TASK. FAILURE TO RETURN WOW
SYSTEM TO NORMAL CONFIGURATION UPON COMPLETION OF THIS
MAINTENANCE TASK MAY CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE TO AIRCRAFT OR
INJURY TO PERSONNEL.
(4) Depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 2.B.(4) to return aircraft to ground mode.
(5) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-10
Page 507
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-10-10
Page 508
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ICE DETECTORS — FAULT ISOLATION

1. (OBSERVED) – EJECTOR FLOW CONTROL VALVE HEATER BLANKET NOT HEATING
(OBSERVED) – EJECTOR FLOW CONTROL VALVE HEATER BLANKET NOT HEATING has been
moved to the Fault Isolation Manual. Refer to Aircraft Fault Isolation Manual, Ejector Flow Control Valve
Heater Blanket Not Heating, 30-10-10, Fault Isolation.

30-10-10
Page 101
July 15/19
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-10-10
Page 102
July 15/19
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ICE DETECTORS — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. Ice Detectors — Removal / Installation
A. General
The left and right ice detectors are located on a mounting plate and installed on both sides of the
forward fuselage at FS 162.20 (4120 mm) behind side console panels 221CZ and 223CZ, in the
flight compartment. Access to ice detectors is obtained through left and right console side panels in
the flight compartment.
The removal and installation procedures for both left and right ice detectors are identical.
B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Circuit breaker safety clips ................................................................................................. Standard
Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
CONSUMABLES
O-ring .......................................................................................................................... M83461/1-154
Sealant ......................................................................................................... AMS3276 or equivalent
(1) References
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Ejector Flow Control Valve Heater Blanket - Test, 30-10-10, Adjustment / Test or Code
300010
• Ice Detectors - Functional Test, 30-10-10, Adjustment / Test or Code 308010
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Select DE ICE WING & TAIL switch on cockpit overhead panel to OFF position.
(c) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ICE DET L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ICE DET R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

(d) Remove access panels 221CZ and 223CZ. See Figure 401.
C. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 402.
(1) Disconnect aircraft wiring from electrical connector (3) on ice detector case (2).
(2) Remove nuts (5), flat washers (7) and stud plate (6) attaching ice detector case (2) to adapter
(4).
(3) Gently pull ice detector case (2) inside aircraft and remove from aircraft.
(4) On Aircraft 116 and subsequent, remove and discard O-ring.
(5) Disconnect ice detector probe (1).

30-10-10
Page 401
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(6) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
(7) On Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 115, clean ice detector base and remove remaining sealant from
aircraft skin.
D. Installation
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 402.
(1) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(2) Prior to installation, inspect ice detector probe (1), mating connector and ice detector case (2)
for damage.
(3) On Aircraft 116 and subsequent, install O-ring on ice detector probe (2).
(4) From inside aircraft, insert ice detector probe (1), position ice detector case (2) on stud plate
(6) and adjust until ice detector case (2) is aligned with mounting holes.
(5) Install flat washers (7) and nuts (5) attaching ice detector case (2) to adapter assembly (4).
(6) On Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 115, apply small smooth fillet of sealant along joint between ice
detector case base and inner aircraft skin.
(7) Connect aircraft wiring to electrical connector (3) on ice detector case (2).
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.B.(2)(c).
(3) Perform Ejector Flow Control Valve Heater Blanket - Test, 30-10-10, Adjustment / Test or
Code 300010.
(4) Perform Ice Detectors - Functional Test, 30-10-10, Adjustment / Test or Code 308010.
(5) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(6) Install access panels removed in Step 1.B.(2)(d).
(7) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-10
Page 402
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

221AZ

221BZ

221CZ

DETAIL A 68256J00

Left Side Console Access Panels

Figure 401 (Sheet 1 of 2)

30-10-10
Page 403
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

223AZ

223BZ

223CZ

DETAIL A 68257J00

Right Side Console Access Panels

Figure 401 (Sheet 2 of 2)

30-10-10
Page 404
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A
FS
162

SEE DETAIL B 2

3
1

5 4
7
DETAIL A

DETAIL B

78331J00

Ice Detector
Figure 402

30-10-10
Page 405
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-10-10
Page 406
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRESSURE REGULATOR — ADJUSTMENT / TEST

1. Pressure Regulator — Adjustment / Test
A. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Auxiliary inlet port plug ..................................................................................................... AN814-8D
Ball valve, quarter turn, 0.5 inch min orifice ....................................................................... Standard
Flow meter, 35 SCFM ......................................................................................................... Standard
Pressure gage 0 - 50 psig .................................................................................................. Standard
Pressure gage 0 - 400 psig ................................................................................................ Standard
Pressure regulator fitting ends ............................................................................... MS33656E10 (2)
Regulated air or nitrogen supply, 0 - 375 psig, 35 SCFM ................................................. Standard
T-fitting ........................................................................................................................... Standard (2)
CONSUMABLES
Safety wire ................................................................................................................... MS20995C20
(1) Reference
• Pressure Regulator - Removal / Installation, 30-10-15, Removal / Installation or Code
301002
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Remove pressure regulator. See Pressure Regulator - Removal / Installation, 30-10-15,
Removal / Installation or Code 301002.
(b) Assemble bench test setup. See Figure 501.
B. Procedure
NOTE: The following procedures have been provided to test and adjust the pressure regulator:
• 1.B1. provides a procedure to test the pressure regulator
• 1.B2. provides a procedure to adjust the pressure regulator
B1. Pressure Regulator Test
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 501.
(1) Ambient test conditions are as follows:
(a) Ambient temperature shall be 59°F - 95°F.
(b) Barometric pressure shall be 24.8 - 31.6 in. Hg.
(c) Relative humidity shall be less than 85%.
(2) Ensure auxiliary inlet port (1) is plugged.
(3) Install pressure regulator (2) into bench test setup.
(4) Turn on regulated supply.
(5) Apply inlet pressures for each test condition listed in Table 501.

30-10-15
Page 501
December 31/07
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Table 501: Pressure Regulator Test Parameters

INLET PRESSURE OUTLET PRESSURE

(PSIG) FLOW RATE (SCFM) (PSIG)
21 +1/-0 1 ±0.2 19 ±1.0
21 +1/-0 35 ±2 19 +1.0/-5.0
80 +3/-0 1 ±0.2 19 ±1.0
80 +3/-0 35 ±2 19 ±1.0

(6) Adjust ball valve to obtain flow rate for each test condition listed in Table 501.
(7) Record outlet pressure for each test condition.
(8) Shut off regulated supply.
(9) If outlet pressures recorded in Step 1.B1.(7) are out of tolerance, proceed to adjustment
procedure Step 1.B2.(1).
(10) Remove pressure regulator (2) from bench test setup.
B2. Pressure Regulator Adjustment
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 501.
(1) Ambient test conditions are as follows:
(a) Ambient temperature shall be 59°F - 95°F.
(b) Barometric pressure shall be 24.8 - 31.6 in. Hg.
(c) Relative humidity shall be less than 85%.
(2) Install pressure regulator (2) into bench test setup.
(3) Cut and remove safety wire (3).
(4) Hold adjustment stem (4) with Allen wrench and loosen lock nut (5).
(5) Turn on regulated supply.
(6) Apply inlet pressure of 80 ±5 psig.
(7) Adjust ball valve to obtain flow rate for 10 SCFM.
(8) Maintain inlet pressure and flow rate then rotate adjustment stem (4) to obtain outlet pressure
of 19.0 ±0.5 psig.
NOTE: Rotate adjustment stem clockwise to raise outlet pressure or counterclockwise to
lower outlet pressure.
(9) Hold adjustment stem (4) with Allen wrench and tighten lock nut (5).
(10) Repeat test procedure Step 1.B1.(5) thru Step 1.B1.(8).
(11) Repeat adjustment procedure as required until pressure regulator parameters are correct.
(12) Shut off regulated supply.
(13) Install safety wire (3) on adjustment stem (4).
(14) Remove pressure regulator (2) from bench test setup.

30-10-15
Page 502
December 31/07
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Install pressure regulator. See Pressure Regulator - Removal / Installation, 30-10-15,
Removal / Installation or Code 301002.
(3) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-15
Page 503
December 31/07
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

0-400 PSI 0-50 PSI

GAGE GAGE

3 2

T-FITTING FITTING FITTING T-FITTING BALL FLOW

REGULATED 5 4 VALVE METER
SUPPLY 1

81306J00

Bench Test Schematic

Figure 501

30-10-15
Page 504
December 31/07
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PRESSURE REGULATOR — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. Pressure Regulator — Removal / Installation
A. General
The pressure regulator is located in the aft fuselage FS 582 (14783 mm).
B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
CONSUMABLES
Soap solution ...................................................................................................................... Standard
(1) References
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Airfoil De-icing System - Leakage Test (With Engine Operating), 30-10-00, Adjustment
/ Test or Code 301000
• Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 301001
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Remove access panel 311AL. See Figure 401.
C. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 402.
(1) Disconnect tube nut (1) from pressure regulator (2).
(2) Disconnect tube nut (3) from pressure regulator (2).
(3) Remove pressure regulator (2) from aircraft.
(4) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
D. Installation
CAUTION: TO PREVENT CONTAMINATION OF SYSTEM, CHECK FOR FOREIGN MATERIALS
IN THE OPEN TUBES / PORTS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT AND EQUIPMENT.
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 402.
(1) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(2) Position pressure regulator (2) between tubes (1, 3).
(3) Connect tube nut (1) to pressure regulator (2).
(4) Connect tube nut (3) to pressure regulator (2).
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Using soap solution, perform Airfoil De-icing System - Leakage Test (With Engine Operating),
30-10-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 301000.

30-10-15
Page 401
April 30/09
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(3) Perform Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment / Test or Code
301001.
(4) Install access panel removed in Step 1.B.(2)(b).
(5) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-15
Page 402
April 30/09
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

310AB

311AL

DETAIL A

69768J00

Empennage Access
Figure 401

30-10-15
Page 403
April 30/09
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3
SEE DETAIL A
FS
582.0

DETAIL B

SEE DETAIL B

NOTE:
1 ON A/C 004-100
(PRE-MOD G2-20133)
DETAIL A
89305J00

Pressure Regulator
Figure 402

30-10-15
Page 404
April 30/09
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

EJECTOR FLOW CONTROL VALVES — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. Ejector Flow Control Valves — Removal / Installation
A. General
The airfoil de-icing system is equipped with three ejector flow control valves (EFCV). One EFCV is
located in the aft fuselage adjacent to the pressure regulator at FS 582 (14783 mm) behind access
panel 311AL. Two EFCVs are located in the forward fuselage FS 365.90 (9294 mm) behind access
panel 132HB.
Except for access, the removal and installation for all ejector flow control valves are identical.
B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Circuit breaker safety clips .................................................................... GSE2400984 or equivalent
Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
CONSUMABLES
Soap solution ...................................................................................................................... Standard
Safety wire ................................................................................................................... MS20995C32
(1) References
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 301001
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Select DE-ICE WING & TAIL switch to OFF position.
(c) Pull, tag and install circuit breaker safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

SURFACE DE-ICE ALT Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
SURFACE DE-ICE NORM Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

(d) For access to forward fuselage EFCV, open access panel 132HB. See Figure 401.
(e) For access to aft fuselage EFCV, remove access panel 311AL. See Figure 402.
C. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 403.
(1) Disconnect electrical connector (3) from EFCV (7).
(2) Disconnect tube nut (1) and remove tube (2) from EFCV (7).
(3) Disconnect tube nut (4) and remove tube (5) from EFCV (7).
(4) Remove safety wire securing bolts (8).
(5) Remove bolts (8) and washers (9) securing EFCV (7) to bracket (6).
(6) Remove EFCV (7) from aircraft.

30-10-20
Page 401
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(7) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
D. Installation
CAUTION: TO PREVENT CONTAMINATION OF SYSTEM, CHECK FOR FOREIGN OBJECTS
IN THE TUBES / PORTS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR SYSTEM FAILURE.
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 403.
(1) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(2) Position EFCV (7) between tubes (2) and (5).
(3) Connect tube nut (1) securing tube (2) to EFCV (7).
(4) Connect tube nut (4) securing tube (5) to EFCV (7).
(5) Install washers (9) and bolts (8) securing EFCV (7) to bracket (6).
(6) Secure bolts (8) with safety wire.
(7) Connect electrical connector (3) to EFCV (7).
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove safety clips and tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.B.(2)(c).
(3) Select DE-ICE WING & TAIL switches to ON position.
(4) Perform Airfoil De-Icing System - Functional Test. See Airfoil De-icing System - Functional
Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 301001.
(5) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(6) Install access door / panel removed in Step 1.B.(2)(e) or Step 1.B.(2)(d).
(7) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-20
Page 402
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

132HB
132KR
132EB
132DB

131BL

132FB

131AL

DETAIL A

68254J00

Access Panel 132HB

Figure 401

30-10-20
Page 403
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Access Panel 311AL

Figure 402

30-10-20
Page 404
August 30/16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Ejector Flow Control Valves

Figure 403 (Sheet 1 of 2)

30-10-20
Page 405
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Ejector Flow Control Valves

Figure 403 (Sheet 2 of 2)

30-10-20
Page 406
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

EJECTOR FLOW CONTROL VALVE (EFCV) HEATER BLANKET — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. Ejector Flow Control Valve Heater Blanket — Removal / Installation
A. General
Each Ejector Flow Control Valve (EFCV) is equipped with a heater blanket. The blankets are
wrapped around the EFCV and secured using a nylon tie strap.
One EFCV is located in the aft fuselage adjacent to the pressure regulator FS 582.0 (14783 mm)
behind access panel 311AL. Two EFCVs are located in the forward fuselage FS 365.90 (9294 mm)
behind access panel 132HB.
Except for access, the removal and installation procedures for all EFCV heater blankets are
identical.
The resistance value of the 58 Watt heat blanket is 12.89 - 14.15 ohms. The resistance value of the
43 Watt heat blanket is 17.08 - 18.88 ohms. Ensure the wires are disconnected before taking
readings.
B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Circuit breaker safety clips ................................................................................................. Standard
Nylon tie strap ..................................................................................................................... Standard
Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
(1) References
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Ejector Flow Control Valve Heater Blanket - Test, 30-10-10, Adjustment / Test or Code
300010
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

SURFACE DE-ICE ALT Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
SURFACE DE-ICE NORM Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

(c) For access to aft fuselage EFCV heater blanket, remove access panel 311AL. See
Figure 401.
(d) For access to forward fuselage EFCVs heater blanket, remove access panel 132HB.
See Figure 402.
C. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 403.
(1) Disconnect electrical leads (2) from terminal board (3).
(2) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
(3) Remove nylon tie strap (4) securing heater blanket (1) to EFCV (5).

30-10-25
Page 401
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(4) Tilt and carefully open heater blanket (1) halves.

(5) Remove heater blanket (1) from EFCV (5).
D. Installation
CAUTION: HEATER BLANKET IS DESIGNED TO OPERATE ONLY WHEN INSTALLED ON
VALVE ASSEMBLY. ATTEMPTS TO OPERATE THE HEATER WHEN IT IS NOT
INSTALLED ON VALVE ASSEMBLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE HEATER
DUE TO AN OVERHEAT CONDITION.
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 403.
(1) Position heater blanket (1) on EFCV assembly (5).
(2) Secure heater blanket using nylon tie strap (4).
(3) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(4) Connect electrical leads (2) to terminal board (3).
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.B.(2)(b).
(3) Perform Ice Detectors and EFCV Heater Blanket Test. See Ejector Flow Control Valve Heater
Blanket - Test, 30-10-10, Adjustment / Test or Code 300010.
(4) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(5) Install access door removed in Step 1.B.(2)(c) or Step 1.B.(2)(d).
(6) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-25
Page 402
November 30/08
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

310AB

311AL

DETAIL A

69768J00

Empennage Access
Figure 401

30-10-25
Page 403
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

132HB
132KR
132EB
132DB

131BL

132FB

131AL

DETAIL A

68254J00

Lower Forward Fuselage Fairing Access Panels

Figure 402

30-10-25
Page 404
November 30/08
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

EFCV Heater Blanket

Figure 403

30-10-25
Page 405
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-10-25
Page 406
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DE-ICING HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH — ADJUSTMENT / TEST

1. De-icing High-pressure Switch — Functional Test
NOTE: The high-pressure switch is located in the forward fuselage at FS 365.90 (9294 mm) behind
access panel 131FB.
A. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

External air source, 0 - 100 psi .......................................................................................... Standard

Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
(1) References
• External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices
• External Electrical Power - Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance
Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• EICAS Activation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices
• EICAS Deactivation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Remove access panel 131FB.
(c) Apply electrical power to aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft,
12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(d) Activate EICAS. See EICAS Activation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices.
(e) Ensure ANTI ICE ENGINE PROBE & NACELLE L and R switches are not depressed.
(f) Unplug test connection plug downstream of pressure regulator. See Figure 501.
(g) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
(h) Connect external air source to test connection.
B. Procedure
CAUTION: THE EXTERNAL AIR SOURCE SHALL BE INCREASED SLOWLY TO AVOID
EXCEEDING MAXIMUM PRESSURE. FAILURE TO COMPLY WILL DAMAGE BOOT
DE-ICER.
(1) Turn on external air source and slowly increase pressure to 27 psig maximum.
(2) Verify DE ICE LOW/HI PRESS message is displayed on EICAS as soon as inlet pressure is
higher than 23 ±1 psig.
(3) Slowly reduce pressure of external air source.
(4) Verify DE ICE LOW/HI PRESS message is not displayed on EICAS as soon as inlet pressure
is lower than 22 psig.
(5) Record value.
C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.

30-10-30
Page 501
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(2) Shut down external air source.

(3) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(4) Disconnect external air source and plug test connection.
(5) Deactivate EICAS. See EICAS Deactivation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices.
(6) Remove electrical power from aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Disconnection from
Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(7) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(8) Install access panel removed in Step 1.A.(2)(b).
(9) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-30
Page 502
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FS
FS 582.0
365.9

HIGH PRESSURE
SWITCH

SEE DETAIL B

SEE DETAIL A
DETAIL A
AIRFRAME DE-ICING
INSTALLATION IN FORWARD FUSELAGE
BLEED AIR
FROM RIGHT
ENGINE REGULATED
REF BLEED AIR
TO HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER
REF

BLEED AIR
FROM LEFT
ENGINE
REF

PRESSURE
REGULATOR CAP
REF

FITTING
REF

REGULATED
BLEED AIR
TO WING TEST CONNECTION
REF PLUG (FOR EXTERNAL
AIR SOURCE)

DETAIL B
AIRFRAME DE-ICING INSTALLATION IN AFT FUSELAGE 77962J00

De-icing High-pressure Switch Test Connection

Figure 501

30-10-30
Page 503
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2. High-pressure Switch — Operational Check

NOTE: This procedure is a Chapter 5 requirement for Post SB 200-05-280 aircraft. The procedure is
acceptable for use on Pre-SB 200-05-280 aircraft if required.
The high-pressure switch is located in the forward fuselage at FS 365.90 (9294 mm) behind
access panel 131FB.
A. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

External air source, 0 - 100 psi ........................................................................................ Regulated

Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
(1) References
• External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices
• External Electrical Power - Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance
Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• EICAS Activation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices
• EICAS Deactivation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Remove access panel 131FB.
(c) Apply electrical power to aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft,
12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(d) Activate EICAS. See EICAS Activation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices.
(e) Ensure ANTI ICE ENGINE PROBE & NACELLE L and R switches are not depressed.
(f) Unplug test connection plug downstream of pressure regulator. See Figure 501.
(g) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
(h) Connect external air source to test connection.
B. Procedure
CAUTION: THE EXTERNAL AIR SOURCE SHOULD BE INCREASED SLOWLY TO AVOID
EXCEEDING MAXIMUM PRESSURE. FAILURE TO COMPLY WILL DAMAGE BOOT
DE-ICER.
(1) Turn on external air source and slowly increase pressure to 27 psig maximum.
NOTE: Pressures higher than 27 psig could cause damage to high-pressure switch.
If pressure of 27 psig is not obtained, cap relief port of pressure regulator.
(2) Verify DE ICE LOW/HI PRESS message is displayed on EICAS as soon as inlet pressure is
higher than 23 ±1 psig.
(3) Slowly reduce pressure of external air source.
(4) Verify DE ICE LOW/HI PRESS message is not displayed on EICAS as soon as inlet pressure
is lower than 22 psig.

30-10-30
Page 504
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(5) Record value.

C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Shut down external air source.
(3) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(4) Disconnect external air source and plug test connection.
(5) Deactivate EICAS. See EICAS Deactivation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices.
(6) Remove electrical power from aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Disconnection from
Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(7) Inspect all de-ice boots for sign of detachment from aircraft skin.
(8) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(9) Install access panel removed in Step 2.A.(2)(b).
(10) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-30
Page 505
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-10-30
Page 506
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DE-ICING HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. De-icing High-pressure Switch — Removal / Installation
A. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Circuit breaker safety clips ................................................................................................. Standard
Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
CONSUMABLES
O-ring .............................................................................................................................. MS9385-04
Safety wire ................................................................................................................... MS20995C32
(1) References
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• De-icing High-pressure Switch - Functional Test, 30-10-30, Adjustment / Test or Code
301015
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Select DE-ICE WING & TAIL switch to OFF position.
(c) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ICE DET L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ICE DET R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

(d) Remove access panels 131FB and 132FB. See Figure 401 and Figure 402.
B. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 403.
(1) Remove safety wire securing switch (2) to tee flared tube (6).
(2) Disconnect electrical connector (1) from switch (2).
(3) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
(4) Remove fitting (4) and O-rings (3, 5) from switch (2). Discard O-rings.
C. Installation
CAUTION: TO PREVENT CONTAMINATION OF SYSTEM, CHECK FOR FOREIGN OBJECTS
IN THE OPEN TUBES / PORTS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT AND EQUIPMENT.
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 403.
(1) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(2) Connect O-rings (3, 5) and fitting (4) to switch (2).
(3) Connect electrical connector (1) to switch (2).

30-10-30
Page 401
April 30/07
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(4) Safety switch (2) to tee flared tube with safety wire.
D. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.A.(2)(c).
(3) Select DE-ICE WING & TAIL switch to ON position.
(4) Perform De-icing High-pressure Switch - Functional Test, 30-10-30, Adjustment / Test or Code
301015.
(5) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(6) Install access panels removed in Step 1.A.(2)(d).
(7) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-30
Page 402
April 30/07
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

132GB

131FB

DETAIL A

69363J00

Fairing Access Doors

Figure 401

30-10-30
Page 403
April 30/07
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

132HB
132KR
132EB
132DB

131BL

132FB

131AL

DETAIL A

68254J00

Lower Forward Fuselage Fairing Access Panels

Figure 402

30-10-30
Page 404
April 30/07
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FS
365.9

SEE DETAIL A

SEE DETAIL B
1

2 DETAIL A
AIRFRAME DE-ICING
INSTALLATION IN FORWARD FUSELAGE
3

DETAIL B
78332J00

De-icing High-pressure Switch

Figure 403

30-10-30
Page 405
April 30/07
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-10-30
Page 406
April 30/07
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DE-ICING LOW PRESSURE SWITCH — ADJUSTMENT / TEST

1. De-icing Low Pressure Switch — Functional Test (Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 100 Pre-Mod G2-20133)
A. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
External air source - 0 to 100 psi ....................................................................................... Standard
Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
(1) References
• External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices
• External Electrical Power - Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance
Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• EICAS Activation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices
• EICAS Deactivation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Remove access panel 311AL. See Figure 501.
(c) Pull, tag and install circuit breakers safety clips on the following circuit breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

(d) Connect external electrical power to aircraft. See External Electrical Power -
Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(e) Activate EICAS. See EICAS Activation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices.
(f) Ensure left and right ENGINE ANTI-ICE pushbuttons are not depressed. See Figure
502.
(g) Unplug test connection plug downstream of pressure regulator. See Figure 503.
(h) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
(i) Connect external air source to test connection, 0 to 100 psi.
B. Procedure
(1) Select L ENGINE ANTI-ICE switch to ON position.
(a) Ensure DE ICE LOW/HI PRESS message is displayed on EICAS after about 4
seconds.
(2) Select L ENGINE ANTI-ICE switch to OFF position.
(a) Ensure DE ICE LOW/HI PRESS message is not displayed on EICAS.
(3) Repeat Step 1.B.(1) and Step 1.B.(2) with R ENGINE ANTI-ICE switch.
(4) Select L ENGINE ANTI-ICE switch to ON position.

30-10-35
Page 501
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(a) Ensure DE ICE LOW/HI PRESS message is displayed on EICAS after about 4
seconds.
(5) Turn on external air source and slowly increase pressure to 35 psig.
(a) Ensure DE ICE LOW/HI PRESS message is not displayed soon as the inlet pressure to
pressure regulator is higher than 16 psig.
(6) Turn off external air source.
(7) Select L ENGINE ANTI-ICE switch to OFF position.
(8) Repeat Step 1.B.(4) thru Step 1.B.(7) with R ENGINE ANTI-ICE switch.
(9) Select R ENGINE ANTI-ICE switch to OFF position.
(10) Shut down external air source.
(11) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(12) Disconnect external air source and plug test connection.
(13) If inspection is satisfactory, task is complete. Proceed to Follow On.
(14) If additional discrepancies are noted, refer to appropriate maintenance manual section for
repairs.
C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Deactivate EICAS. See EICAS Deactivation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices.
(3) Disconnect external electrical power from aircraft. See External Electrical Power -
Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(4) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(5) Install access panels removed in Step 1.A.(2)(b).
(6) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-35
Page 502
March 31/06
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Access Panel - 311AL

Figure 501

30-10-35
Page 503
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Engine Anti-ice Pushbuttons

Figure 502

30-10-35
Page 504
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

De-icing Low Pressure Switch Test Connection

Figure 503

30-10-35
Page 505
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-10-35
Page 506
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DE-ICING LOW PRESSURE SWITCH — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. De-icing Low-Pressure Switch — Removal / Installation (Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 100 Pre-Mod
G2-20133)
A. General
The low-pressure switch is located in the aft fuselage FS 582.00 (14783 mm) behind access panel
311AL.
B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Circuit breaker safety clips ................................................................................................. Standard
Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
CONSUMABLES
O-ring .............................................................................................................................. MS9385-04
O-ring .............................................................................................................................. MS9385-10
Safety wire ................................................................................................................... MS20995C32
(1) References
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• De-icing Low Pressure Switch - Functional Test (Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 100 Pre-Mod
G2-20133), 30-10-35, Adjustment / Test
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Select DE-ICE WING & TAIL switch to OFF position.
(c) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ICE DET L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ICE DET R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

(d) Remove access panel 311AL. See Figure 401.

C. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 402.
(1) Remove safety wire securing switch (2) to tee flared tube (6).
(2) Disconnect electrical connector (1) from switch (2).
(3) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
(4) Separate fitting (4) in conjunction with O-ring (3) from switch (2). Discard O-ring.

30-10-35
Page 401
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

D. Installation
CAUTION: TO PREVENT CONTAMINATION OF SYSTEM, CHECK FOR FOREIGN OBJECTS
IN THE OPEN TUBES / PORTS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT AND EQUIPMENT.
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 402.
(1) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(2) Position O-ring (3), P/N MS9385-04 on switch (2) and connect fitting (4) to switch (2).
(3) Connect electrical connector (1) to switch (2).
(4) Safety switch (2) to tee flared tube (6) with safety wire.
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.B.(2)(c).
(3) Select DE-ICE WING & TAIL switch to ON position.
(4) Perform De-Icing, Low Pressure Switch Functional Test. See De-icing Low Pressure Switch -
Functional Test (Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 100 Pre-Mod G2-20133), 30-10-35, Adjustment /
Test.
(5) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(6) Install access panels removed in Step 1.B.(2)(d).
(7) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-35
Page 402
March 31/06
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Access Panel - 311AL

Figure 401

30-10-35
Page 403
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Low Pressure Switch ( Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 100 Pre-Mod G2-20133)
Figure 402

30-10-35
Page 404
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DE-ICER BOOTS — INSPECTION / CHECK

1. De-icer Boots — General Visual Inspection
NOTE: De-icer boots are installed on the wing and horizontal stabilizer leading edges. Wing de-icer
boots are divided into inboard sections, on the fixed portion of the leading edges and Krueger
flaps and outboard sections on the slats.
A. Preparation
CONSUMABLES

Mild soapy water ................................................................................................................. Standard

(1) Reference(s)
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Black De-icer Boots - Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code
301007
• Silver Estane De-icer Boots - Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or
Code 301051
• Silver Urethane De-icer Boots - Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation
or Code 301061
• FASTboots - Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301071
• De-icer Boots - Repair, 30-10-40, Repair
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Remove the following access panels (see Figure 601):

321CL 321JL 321KL 321LL

321ML 321NL 322CR 322JR
322KR 322LR 322MR 322NR
510DL 520DL 610DR 620DR

(c) Apply electrical power to aircraft.

(d) Apply hydraulic power to aircraft.
(e) Extend slats and Krueger flaps by placing FLAPS / SLATS handle to DN.
(f) Remove hydraulic power from aircraft.
(g) Remove electrical power from aircraft.
B. Inspection
CAUTION: INSTALLATION OR CONTINUED USE OF A DE-ICER BASED ON INSPECTION
CRITERIA IS AT USER’S DISCRETION.
NOTE: A general visual inspection is an inspection for obvious unsatisfactory conditions or
discrepancies.
The following is used in conjunction with Figure 602.
(1) Perform a general visual inspection of de-icer hoses and boots as follows:

30-10-40
Page 601
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(a) Inspect de-ice supply line hoses for any cracks, cuts, material degradation or tears.
Replace as necessary.
(b) Inspect de-icer boots carefully for surface damage such as foreign objects, debonding,
pin holes, cuts, tears, abrasions, scuffs, cracking and / or crazing. Inspect backside,
breeze side and air connection carefully.
1 If damage is found and exceeds 5 inches x 10 inches, perform the following:
a Replace de-icer boot. See Black De-icer Boots - Removal / Installation,
30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301007, Silver Estane De-icer
Boots - Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code
301051, Silver Urethane De-icer Boots - Removal / Installation, 30-10-40,
Removal / Installation or Code 301061 or FASTboots - Removal /
Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301071.
b Proceed to Step 1.C.(1).
2 If damage is found and does not exceed 5 inches x 10 inches, perform the
following:
a Repair de-icer boot. See De-icer Boots - Repair, 30-10-40, Repair.
NOTE: While performing functional test after repair, check for damage
with de-icer boots inflated using mild soapy water. Air leaking
damage can be located and marked for repair.
b If leaks are found, replace de-icer boot. See Black De-icer Boots - Removal
/ Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301007, Silver
Estane De-icer Boots - Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal /
Installation or Code 301051, Silver Urethane De-icer Boots - Removal /
Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301061 or
FASTboots - Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or
Code 301071.
c Proceed to Step 1.C.(1).
C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Apply electrical power to aircraft.
(3) Apply hydraulic power to aircraft.
(4) Retract slats by placing SLATS / FLAPS handle to UP.
(5) Remove hydraulic power from aircraft.
(6) Remove electrical power from aircraft.
(7) Install access panels removed in Step 1.A.(2)(b).
(8) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-40
Page 602
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

510DL

510EL

520DL

520FL-2 520EL

520FL

520GL

520HL
520HL-2

550AT

540NT FWD
550ET

DETAIL A
69479J02

Left Wing Upper Access Panels

Figure 601 (Sheet 1 of 4)

30-10-40
Page 603
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

610DR

610ER

620DR

620ER

620FR
620FR-2

620GR
620HR

620HR-2

650AT

FWD
640NT
650ET

DETAIL A
69480J02

Right Wing Upper Access Panels

Figure 601 (Sheet 2 of 4)

30-10-40
Page 604
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A
323CL
REF
321DL
323BL
REF

321BL

321AL

SEE DETAIL B

DETAIL A

321CL
321KL

321ML

342AL

321NL

321JL
321LL

DETAIL B 68261J02

Rudder and Vertical Stabilizer Access Panels

Figure 601 (Sheet 3 of 4)

30-10-40
Page 605
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

322GR

322DR

SEE DETAIL B
323ER
322HR
323DR
323CR 322AR

323BR

322FR

322ER
322BR

322CR

DETAIL A
322KR

322MR

342AR

322NR

322LR 322JR

DETAIL B 68262J02

Rudder and Vertical Stabilizer Access Panels

Figure 601 (Sheet 4 of 4)

30-10-40
Page 606
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL C

SEE DETAIL F

SEE DETAIL E

SEE DETAIL A

96292J00

De-ice Supply Line Hoses and Boots

Figure 602 (Sheet 1 of 4)

30-10-40
Page 607
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

RIB 6

RIB 3

RIB 0

SEE DETAIL B

DETAIL A

LEFT WING DE-ICER

SUPPLY LINE HOSES
(RIGHT SIDE OPPOSITE)

DETAIL B
96293J00

Wing De-ice Supply Line Hoses

Figure 602 (Sheet 2 of 4)

30-10-40
Page 608
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL D

DETAIL C

TO
R
SID IGHT
E

LEFT HORIZONAL DE-ICER

SUPPLY LINE HOSE
(RIGHT SIDE OPPOSITE)

DETAIL D
96294J00

Horizontal Stabilizer Supply Line De-ice Hoses

Figure 602 (Sheet 3 of 4)

30-10-40
Page 609
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

OUTBOARD SLAT DE-ICER

LEFT HALF SLAT

INBOARD SLAT DE-ICER

INBOARD FIXED WING DE-ICER

KREUGER FLAP DE-ICER LEFT WING DE-ICER BOOTS

(RIGHT SIDE OPPOSITE)

DETAIL E

LEFT HORIZONTAL STABILIZER

DE-ICER BOOTS
(RIGHT SIDE OPPOSITE)

DETAIL F 96295J00

Wing and Horizontal Stabilizer De-ice Boots

Figure 602 (Sheet 4 of 4)

30-10-40
Page 610
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DE-ICER BOOTS — REPAIR

1. De-icer Boots — Repair
NOTE: This procedure applies to black neoprene, black Estane®, silver Estane®, silver urethane and
FASTboots® pneumatic de-icer boots. The type of de-icer boots is identifiable by part number on
the boots and can be identified by part number in the illustrated parts catalog.
A. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

Rubber roller, 2.5 inches (63.5 mm) wide x 2 inches (50.8 mm) diameter ....................... Standard
CONSUMABLES
Black patch repair kit ........................................................................................................ 74-451-AA
Detergent ............................................................................................................................ Standard
Finishing spray kit (silver Estane boots) ......................................................................... 74-451-S-2
Isopropyl alcohol ................................................................................................................. Standard
Lint free cloth ...................................................................................................................... Standard
Masking tape, 1 inch (25.4 mm) ......................................................................................... Standard
Mixing cup ........................................................................................................................... Standard
Pinhole repair kit (black and Estane boots) ..................................................................... 74-451-AE
Pinhole repair kit (urethane and FASTBoots) .................................................................. 74-451-AP
Scotch brite, fine grit ........................................................................................................... Standard
Silver patch repair kit ....................................................................................................... 74-451-S-1
Solvent .................................................................................................................. Toluene TT-T-548
Wood stir stick .................................................................................................................... Standard
(1) Reference(s)
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 301001
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Apply the following repair restrictions:
1 General
a Immediate repair of air leaks is recommended to maintain optimal de-icer
performance.
NOTE: It is not mandatory to repair damage that does not leak.
b Largest allowable patch is 5 x 10 inches (127 x 254 mm).
c Damaged area must be covered by patch at least 0.5 inch (12.7 mm)
beyond damaged area in all directions.
2 Surface Damage
a Surface damage that does not leak air when de-icer is inflated does not
require repair. If desired, finish spray may be applied to Estane boots.
b Surface damage that leaks when de-icer is inflated, but does not cut
inflatable tube, should be repaired. Area shall not exceed 4 x 9 inches
(101.5 x 228.6 mm).

30-10-40
Page 801
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 Damage to Inflatable Tube Area

a Cuts, tears or ruptures that leak air when de-icer is inflated, but do not cut
inflatable tube fabric, should be repaired. Area shall not exceed 4 x 9
inches (101.5 x 228.6 mm).
4 Damage to Noninflatable Area
a For neoprene boots, cuts, tears or ruptures less than 4 x 9 inches (101.5 x
228.6 mm) can be repaired.
b For Estane, urethane and FASTBoots, cuts, tears or ruptures less than 3
inches (76.2 mm) in length can be repaired.
c Separation of surface ply less than 3 square inches (76.2 square mm) can
be repaired by trimming away loose surface material and repairing.
5 Pinholes
a Pinholes less than 1/16 inch (1.58 mm) in diameter can be repaired using
pinhole repair procedure.
b Pinholes greater than 1/16 inch (1.58 mm) in diameter can be repaired with
patch installation procedure.
6 Unrepairable Damage (De-Icer Boot Must Be Replaced)
a Cuts, tears and ruptures that cut inflatable tube fabric.
b Broken stitch or thread.
c Damage that leaks air and exceeds 4 x 9 inches (101.5 x 228.6 mm).
d Damage that leaks air and exceeds patch limits in Step 1.A.(2)(c).
(c) In order to maintain optimal functional efficiency of de-icer boot, the following patch
limits are recommended:
• Three small patches per 12 inches (304.8 mm) square [small patch is 1.25 x 2.5
inches (31.75 x 63.5 mm)]
• Two medium patches per 12 inches (304.8 mm) square [medium patch is 2.5 x 5
inches (63.5 x 127 mm)]
• One large patch per 12 inches (304.8 mm) square [large patch is 5 x 10 inches
(127 x 254 mm)]
• Two small patches and one medium patch per 12 inches (304.8 mm) square
• Twenty pinhole repairs per 12 inches (304.8 mm) square
NOTE: It is permissible to have multiple patch areas as long as the 12 inches (304.8
mm) square guidelines are followed. The patches may butt up against each
other, but may not overlap.

30-10-40
Page 802
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

B. Procedure
WARNING: SOLVENTS ARE TOXIC AND WHEN INHALED CAN INDUCE HEADACHES AND
DIZZINESS. AVOID EYE AND SKIN CONTACT OR PROLONGED BREATHING.
OBEY SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING AND WORKING WITH
FLAMMABLE AND TOXIC MATERIALS. WORK IN AN AREA THAT HAS A GOOD
FLOW OF CLEAN AIR. WORK IN AREA THAT HAS NO SPARKS, FLAME AND
HOT SURFACES. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL.
NOTE: The following procedures perform de-icer boot repairs:
• 1.B1. provides procedures to install patches on de-icer boot
• 1.B2. provides procedures to refurbish patches on de-icer boot
• 1.B3. provides procedures to apply finish spray to silver Estane de-icer boot
• 1.B4. provides procedures to repair pinholes
B1. Patch Installation
CAUTION: EACH KITS PATCH ADHESION IS TEMPERATURE SENSITIVE. IF TEMPERATURE
IS UNDER 50°F, WARM DE-ICER BOOT SURFACE PRIOR TO APPLYING PRIMER
AND WARM INSTALLED PATCH WHILE DRYING. TO WARM, HOLD PLASTIC BAG
FILLED WITH HOT WATER ON DE-ICER BOOT SURFACE AND ON INSTALLED
PATCH. IF SURFACE AND INSTALLED PATCH ARE NOT WARMED, PATCH MAY
NOT ADHERE.
PATCHES HAVE A ONE-WAY STRETCH ACROSS THE WIDTH OF PATCH SO
PATCH WILL STRETCH AS DE-ICER BOOT IS INFLATED. PATCH MUST BE
INSTALLED WITH LENGTH PARALLEL TO DE-ICER TUBES. FAILURE TO DO SO
MAY RESULT IN PATCH LIFTING WHEN DE-ICER BOOTS ARE INFLATED.
(1) Clean de-icer boot surface to be patched with detergent and hot water, using lint free cloths
to remove dirt, grease and cosmetic coatings. If oil or silicone contamination is present,
repeat until contamination is removed.
NOTE: When de-icer boot requires cleaning, use warm, soapy water instead of alcohol. Use
alcohol only on flat areas of the boot and avoid use in creased areas.
(2) Using buffing shield or selected patch as template, outline damaged area.
CAUTION: BUFF SILVER COATING DOWN TO THE GRAY SUBPLY. DO NOT BUFF
THROUGH THE GRAY SUBPLY TO THE BLACK RESILIENT LAYER.
(3) Use buffing shield, if available, and buff de-icer boot surface with medium grit emery cloth or
equivalent.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE MEK ON ESTANE SURFACE DE-ICERS AS MEK WILL
DAMAGE ESTANE.
(4) Wipe de-icer boot surface with cloth dampened with solvent and let dry.
(5) Apply one coat of primer to de-icer boot surface. Let dry to touch (5 - 10 minutes).
NOTE: Primer is applied by pressing tip of primer container against surface. Amount of
primer delivered is controlled by amount of pressure applied to tip. If tip is dry when
application begins, press tip until primer is delivered.
(6) Remove paper backing from patch and press over primed de-icer boot surface.

30-10-40
Page 803
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

NOTE: Standard patch sizes can be trimmed to accommodate small areas of damage, as
long as patch extends a minimum of 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) beyond damage on all
sides.
(7) Roll with rubber roller.
(8) Allow 30 minutes dry time before inflating de-icer boot or applying finishing spray.
(9) If desired, apply finish spray. See Step 1.B3. Finish Spray For Silver Estane Boots.
B2. Patch Refurbishment
(1) Remove old patch by peeling off de-icer.
(2) Remove adhesive remaining on de-icer with emery cloth soaked in solvent.
(3) Perform Step 1.B1. Patch Installation to install new patch.
B3. Finish Spray For Silver Estane Boots
NOTE: Finishing spray is for cosmetic purposes only and is optional.
(1) Assemble Jet-Pak per instructions on container.
(2) Shake silver surface spray thoroughly to ensure solids are in solution. Pour into Jet-Pak spray
bottle and connect Jet-Pak hardware.
NOTE: Jet-Pak should be shaken before and during the spray application to prevent
settling.
It is recommended that users practice spraying a smooth clean surface before
attempting to spray a finish coat on the de-icer surface.
(3) Hold Jet-Pak about 10 - 12 inches (254 - 304.8 mm) from de-icer surface. Apply silver spray
to surface in steady, even, back and forth motion. Adjust rate and overlap of strokes to give
the lightest uniform coat.
NOTE: Avoid spraying if any breeze is present as it may cause a rough surface
appearance.
(4) Apply at least two coats of finishing spray allowing minimum of 30 minutes between coats.
Feather spray when moving further away from patched area to create smooth transition and
blend color with rest of de-icer surface.
B4. Pinhole Repair
CAUTION: USE OF PINHOLE REPAIR KIT IS NOT RECOMMENDED BELOW 50°F (10°C)
BECAUSE REPAIR MATERIAL MAY NOT DRY.
NOTE: Pinhole to be repaired must not exceed 1/16 inch (1.58 mm) in diameter.
(1) Clean de-icer surface to be repaired using lint free cloth, detergent and hot water to remove
dirt, grease and cosmetic coatings. Repeat until oil and silicone contamination is removed.
NOTE: When de-icer boot requires cleaning, use warm, soapy water instead of alcohol. Use
alcohol only on flat areas of the boot and avoid use in creased areas.
(2) Isolate repair area with buffing template.
(3) Buff isolated area with scotch brite or equivalent.
(4) Wipe isolated area with lint free cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent. Allow to
dry.

30-10-40
Page 804
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(5) Secure application template to de-icer surface with template hole centered over pinhole to be
repaired.
CAUTION: USE ONLY PINHOLE KIT APPLICABLE TO DE-ICER BOOT TYPE.
(6) Open foil overpack of cement.
(7) Clip corner of appli-pak pouch and squeeze cement into mixing cup. Ensure all material from
pouch is squeezed into mixing cup to maintain proper mix ration with accelerator.
CAUTION: RECAP ACCELERATOR TIGHTLY AFTER USE AS ACCELERATOR WILL
HARDEN IF NOT SEALED COMPLETELY.
(8) Add seven drops of accelerator to mixing cup.
NOTE: Mixed repair material must be used within 2 hours.
(9) Mix thoroughly with wooden stir stick. Ensure material on sides of cup is thoroughly mixed.
(10) Apply repair material into hole in application template with wooden stir stick. Push repair
material firmly into pinhole.
NOTE: Remove application template as soon as repair material is applied and leveled to
ensure smooth appearance.
(11) Level repair material with application tool.
NOTE: If repair material is spilled on undamaged de-icer surface, remove immediately with
solvent.
(12) Allow 2 hours drying time before flying aircraft or inflating de-icer boot.
(13) For silver Estane boots only, apply finish spray if desired. See Step 1.B3. Finish Spray For
Silver Estane Boots.
C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) After drying time, perform Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment /
Test or Code 301001.
(3) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.
2. Slat Conductive Edge Sealer — Repair
NOTE: This procedure is applicable to neoprene slat de-icers only. The repair provides a slat conductive
edge sealer that is more resistant to the environment and abrasion.
A. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

Nylon or plastic scraper ...................................................................................................... Standard

Paint brush .......................................................................................................................... Standard
Vacuum cleaner .................................................................................................................. Standard
CONSUMABLES
A-56B conductive edge sealer kit (1/2 pint) ...................................................................... 74-451-11
A-56B conductive edge sealer kit (quart) ...................................................................... 74-451-11-1
Isoproply alcohol ................................................................................................................. Standard
Lint free cloth ...................................................................................................................... Standard
Masking tape, 1 inch ........................................................................................................... Standard

30-10-40
Page 805
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Scotch-brite, very fine ......................................................................................................... Standard

Sealant .................................................................................................................. PR-1425, class B
Sealant .................................................................................................................. PR-1440, class B
Toluene ................................................................................................................................ TT-T-548
Wooden stir stick ................................................................................................................ Standard
(1) Reference
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
B. Procedure
NOTE: The following procedures repairs the slats conductive edge sealer:
• 2.B1. procedure applies to de-icers with A-56B conductive edge sealer
• 2.B2. procedure applies to de-icers with 74-451-P conductive edge sealer
B1. De-Icers with A-56B Conductive Edge Sealer
(1) Remove contamination from existing A-56B conductive edge sealer and de-icer edges by
wiping area with lint free cloth dampened with isopropyl alcohol. Continue wiping until lint free
cloth remains clean.
(2) Apply masking tape on deicer, using existing edge or conductive edge sealer as tape line. If
existing edge of conductive edge sealer is not visible, apply masking tape on the de-icer
surface around de-icer and cut-outs at least 0.25 inch from edge.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove cement or FASTbootTM primer that extends beyond
de-icer edge as this can be covered by edge sealer.
(3) Apply masking tape on leading edge 0.75 inch aft of de-icer edge. Form neat straight lines to
border edge sealer application.
(4) Stir A-56B conductive edge sealer thoroughly to mix solids. If desired, dilute with Toluene, not
to exceed 20% by volume.
NOTE: One-half pint of A-56B conductive edge sealer covers approximately 155 linear feet.
(5) Apply even brush coat of A-56B conductive edge sealer between tape lines.
(6) Remove tape as edge sealer is applied. An easy method to remove tape is to attach ends of
masking tape lines to a cardboard cylinder (such as that shipped with de-icer boot) and roll
cylinder to take up two lines of tape as edge sealer is applied.
(7) Allow A-56B conductive edge sealer to cure 20 - 30 minutes at room temperature.
(8) Apply masking tape on de-icer using existing edges of A-56B conductive edge sealer as tape
line. Apply masking tape on leading edge 0.25 inch aft of existing A-56B conductive edge
sealer line. Form neat, straight lines to form border for sealant application.
(9) Apply PR-1425 sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. Cure 24 hours at
room temperature for B-1/2. Cure 48 hours at room temperature for B-2.
CAUTION: FAILURE TO MONITOR HEAT SOURCE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO
NEOPRENE DE-ICER.
(10) Sealant PR-1425 is the recommended sealant. For shorter drying time, apply PR-1440

30-10-40
Page 806
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. Cure 6 hours at 125 ±5°F for B-1/2.
Cure 8 hours at 125 ±5°F for B-2.
(11) Remove masking tape.
B2. De-Icers with 74-451-P Conductive Edge Sealer
(1) Remove all loose 74-451-P conductive edge sealer that can be pulled off.
CAUTION: THE ADHESIVE USED TO BOND THE 74-451-P CONDUCTIVE EDGE
SEALER TO THE NEOPRENE DE-ICER IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THE
A-56B CONDUCTIVE EDGE SEALER. FAILURE TO REMOVE ALL OF THE
RESIDUE FROM THE ADHESIVE MAY CAUSE AN INSUFFICIENT BOND
BETWEEN THE A–56B CONDUCTIVE EDGE SEALER AND THE NEOPRENE
DE-ICER.
(2) Using Toluene and a nylon or plastic scraper, scrape off all existing tape and adhesive residue
from de-icer and airfoil surface.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove existing PR-1422 or PR-1425 edge filler.
(3) Using scotch-brite, lightly scuff area on de-icer and leading edge surface where A-56B will be
applied.
(4) Vacuum or rinse with water to remove sanding particles.
(5) Apply masking tape on deicer surface and cut-outs at least 0.25 inch from edge. If edge filler
has been used, make sure masking tape applied on de-icer is at least 0.13 - 0.25 inch in from
edge filler.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove cement or FASTbootTM primer that extends beyond
de-icer edge as this can be covered by edge sealer.
(6) Apply masking tape on leading edge 0.75 inch aft of de-icer edge. Form neat straight lines to
border edge sealer application.
(7) Stir A-56B conductive edge sealer thoroughly to mix solids. If desired, dilute with Toluene, not
to exceed 20% by volume.
NOTE: One-half pint of A-56B conductive edge sealer covers approximately 155 linear feet.
(8) Apply even brush coat of A-56B conductive edge sealer between tape lines.
(9) Remove tape as edge sealer is applied. An easy method to remove tape is to attach ends of
masking tape lines to a cardboard cylinder (such as that shipped with de-icer boot) and roll
cylinder to take up two lines of tape as edge sealer is applied.
(10) Allow A-56B conductive edge sealer to cure 20 - 30 minutes at room temperature.
(11) Apply masking tape on de-icer using existing edges of A-56B conductive edge sealer as tape
line. Apply masking tape on leading edge 0.25 inch aft of existing A-56B conductive edge
sealer line. Form neat, straight lines to form border for sealant application.
(12) Apply PR-1425 sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. Cure 24 hours at
room temperature for B-1/2. Cure 48 hours at room temperature for B-2.
CAUTION: FAILURE TO MONITOR HEAT SOURCE MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO
NEOPRENE DE-ICER.
(13) Sealant PR-1425 is the recommended sealant. For shorter drying time, apply PR-1440
sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. Cure 6 hours at 125 ±5°F for B-1/2.
Cure 8 hours at 125 ±5°F for B-2.

30-10-40
Page 807
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(14) Remove masking tape.

C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-40
Page 808
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DE-ICER BOOTS — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. Black De-icer Boots — Removal / Installation
A. General
This procedure applies only to the black neoprene or black Estane® pneumatic de-icer boots. The
black boots are identifiable by part number on the boots and can be identified by part number in the
illustrated parts catalog. For installation of other boot types, see Silver Estane De-icer Boots -
Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301051, Silver Urethane De-icer
Boots - Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301061 or FASTboots -
Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301071.
Black neoprene pneumatic de-icer boots are installed on the slats and horizontal stabilizers. Black
Estane® de-icer boots are installed on the fixed leading edge and Krueger flaps. The black de-icer
boots must be installed symmetrically. For example, if silver de-icer boot is replaced with black boot
on the left slat, the right slat must also be replaced with a black boot.
Black de-icer boots use a bonding system that consists of an adhesive cement and a tackifying
solvent to bond the de-icer boots to the aircraft surface.
B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Adhesive brush, 3 inches (76.2 mm), boar’s bristle ........................................................... Standard
Chalk line ............................................................................................................................ Standard
Circuit breaker safety clips .................................................................... GSE2400984 or equivalent
Edge sealer brush, 3 inches (76.2 mm), pure bristle ......................................................... Standard
Hook knife ........................................................................................................................... Standard
Metal roller, 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) wide x 2 inches (50.8 mm) diameter .............................. Standard
Putty knife ........................................................................................................................... Standard
Rubber roller, 2.5 inches (63.5 mm) wide x 2 inches (50.8 mm) diameter ....................... Standard
Spray bottle ......................................................................................................................... Standard
Straight edge ....................................................................................................................... Standard
Vacuum source, 6 - 10 in. Hg. ............................................................................................ Standard
CONSUMABLES
Abrasive paper .................................................................................................................... TT-4-248
Adhesive ................................................................................................................ 1300L (see Note)
Alcohol ................................................................................................................................ TT-1-734
Conductive edge sealer (Estane®) ................................................................... 74-451-K, 74-451-P
Conductive edge sealer (neoprene) ....................................................................... A-56B, 74-451-P
Edge filler ...................................................................................................... PRC1422 or PRC1425
Flashtape, 1.0 inch x 0.001 inch (25.4 x 0.0254 mm) ............................ Northern Fiberglass Sales
Gap filler (aircraft structure) ............................................ PRC1422, PRC1425 (B-1/2) or PRC1750
Leading edge stripper ........................................ Methyl Ethyl Keytone, Toluene or Peerco No. 321
Lint free cloth ...................................................................................................................... Standard
Masking tape, 1.0 inch (25.4 mm) ...................................................................................... Standard
Mixing cup ........................................................................................................................... Standard
Sealant (black slats only) ................................................... PR-1425, Class B or PR-1440, Class B
Silicone grease ................................................................................... AMS-G-4343 (Molykote 55M)
Solvent .................................................................................................................. Toluene TT-T-548
Stir stick .............................................................................................................................. Standard

30-10-40
Page 401
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

NOTE: Do not use Toluene-free Contact Rubber Adhesive 1300 L. The only approved adhesive
for de-icer boot installation is Neoprene High Performance Rubber and Gasket Adhesive
1300L.
(1) Reference(s)
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 301001
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Pull, tag and safety clip the following circuit breaker(s):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

SURFACE DE-ICE ALT Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
SURFACE DE-ICE NORM Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

C. Removal
WARNING: MANY OF THE MATERIALS SPECIFIED HAVE SIGNIFICANT OCCUPATIONAL
SAFETY, HEALTH OR ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS RELATED TO THEIR
USE. SAFETY DATA SHEETS SHALL BE CONSULTED FOR ALL MATERIALS TO
DETERMINE THE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS CONCERNING
OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE PRECAUTIONS. IT IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY
OF THE USER TO ENSURE PROTECTION FROM INJURY OR EXPOSURE, SAFE
APPLICATION OF MATERIALS AND COMPLIANCE WITH ANY FEDERAL, STATE
OR LOCAL REGULATIONS REGARDING THE USE OF ANY OF THE MATERIALS
SPECIFIED.
CAUTION: ENSURE LADDERS DO NOT RUB AGAINST DE-ICER BOOTS DURING
MAINTENANCE. DAMAGE TO DE-ICER BOOTS COULD RESULT.
(1) Use spray bottle to apply solvent to upper corner of boot while using tension to peel back
corner of boot.
(2) Work with solvent and tension to separate boot from leading edge for width of 4 inches (101.6
mm) along boot’s entire upper trailing edge.
(3) Area between boot and airfoil where boot has been separated acts as reservoir for solvent.
Apply solvent and peel boot down toward leading edge with uniform tension.
(4) If boot is to be preserved, continue to work with solvent and tension along upper edge, pulling
boot toward center line.
CAUTION: WHEN SCORING BOOT FOR REMOVAL, DO NOT DAMAGE LEADING
EDGE. SCORE ONLY THROUGH FABRIC CARCASS TO FACILITATE
REMOVAL.
(5) If boot is to be discarded, remove by scoring and peeling boot in strips parallel to tubes. Work
with solvent and tension to remove strips individually.

30-10-40
Page 402
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CAUTION: ALL STRIPPER RESIDUE MUST BE REMOVED BEFORE BOOT

INSTALLATION. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INADEQUATE
ADHESION.
(6) Remove residual adhesive with leading edge stripper (Peerco No. 321 is preferred).
(7) Clean area thoroughly with solvent.
D. Installation
WARNING: MANY OF THE MATERIALS SPECIFIED HAVE SIGNIFICANT OCCUPATIONAL
SAFETY, HEALTH OR ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS RELATED TO THEIR
USE. SAFETY DATA SHEETS SHALL BE CONSULTED FOR ALL MATERIALS TO
DETERMINE THE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS CONCERNING
OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE PRECAUTIONS. IT IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY
OF THE USER TO ENSURE PROTECTION FROM INJURY OR EXPOSURE, SAFE
APPLICATION OF MATERIALS AND COMPLIANCE WITH ANY FEDERAL, STATE
OR LOCAL REGULATIONS REGARDING THE USE OF ANY OF THE MATERIALS
SPECIFIED.
CAUTION: DO NOT INSTALL AT TEMPERATURE BELOW 50°F (10°C) OR IN HUMIDITY
HIGHER THAN 90%, AS PROPER ADHESION MAY NOT BE OBTAINED
REGARDLESS OF DRY TIME ALLOWED.
DUE TO THE COMPLEXITY OF THIS BOOT (MANY BENDS AND ANGLES), IT IS
EASY TO END UP WITH INSUFFICIENT MATERIAL DURING INSTALLATION.
LEAVE AS MUCH MATERIAL AS POSSIBLE ON THE BOOT DURING INITIAL
TRIMMING AND UNTIL ENTIRE BOOT IS INSTALLED. TRIM AS NEEDED DURING
FINAL TRIMMING UPON INSTALLATION.
(1) Prepare leading edges as follows:
(a) Dry fit de-icer boot on the leading edge. Ensure de-icer air connection fits in air
connection hole in leading edge and cutouts are properly aligned.
(b) Use de-icer boot as template to mask off installation area with 1 inch (25.4 mm)
masking tape. For nonrecessed de-icers, allow at least 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) extra around
edge.
(c) Mark de-icer center line on masking tape on each end.
NOTE: De-icer boot center line may not correspond with center line of aircraft leading
edge. When dry fitting de-icer boot on the inboard fixed leading edge, ensure
the lower line on back of boot lines up with edge of flap cutout on leading edge
before marking boot center line on the leading edge.
(d) Remove paint and primer within masked area with stripper (Peerco No. 321 is
preferred). De-icer boot can be installed on alodine or anodized aluminum surfaces and
on composite surfaces with primer.
(e) Abrade aluminum and composite surfaces as follows:
1 Composite surfaces are to be abraded with No. 240 aluminum oxide abrasive
paper and aluminum surfaces with fine No. 290 - 320 aluminum oxide abrasive
paper.
2 Remove sanding particles by using pressurized air or dry lint free cloth.
(f) Wipe masked area with solvent at least twice. Wipe dry with clean lint free cloth before
solvent evaporates.

30-10-40
Page 403
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(g) Apply aircraft structure gap filler to skin splice gaps on leading edge as required.
(2) Prepare de-icer boot as follows:
(a) Moisten clean lint free cloth with solvent and wipe back side of de-icer at least twice.
Change cloth frequently to avoid recontamination.
(3) Apply adhesive as follows:
WARNING: 1300L ADHESIVE CONTAINS METHYL ETHYL KETONE WHICH IS
EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE. EXTINGUISH OPEN FLAMES. AVOID SPARKS.
USE IN WELL VENTILATED AREA. AVOID SKIN CONTACT AND / OR
PROLONGED BREATHING OF VAPORS. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND / OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY ADHESIVE BY SPRAYING, AS COATING MAY BE TOO THIN
OR UNEVEN TO PROVIDE PROPER ADHESION. SPRAY APPLICATION OF
EXTRA ADHESIVE COATS DOES NOT COMPENSATE FOR THINNER
CONSISTENCY.
DO NOT INSTALL AT TEMPERATURE BELOW 50°F (10°C) OR IN HUMIDITY
HIGHER THAN 90%, AS PROPER ADHESION MAY NOT BE OBTAINED
REGARDLESS OF DRY TIME ALLOWED. DRY FIT DE-ICER BOOT TO
ENSURE FIT BEFORE APPLYING ADHESIVE.
DO NOT USE TOLUENE-FREE CONTACT RUBBER ADHESIVE 1300 L AS IT
HAS A SIGNIFICANTLY LOWER ADHESIVE STRENGTH. THE ONLY
APPROVED ADHESIVE FOR DE-ICER BOOT INSTALLATION IS NEOPRENE
HIGH PERFORMANCE RUBBER AND GASKET ADHESIVE 1300L.
(a) Thoroughly mix adhesive to blend solids.
(b) Apply one even brush coat to back side of de-icer and leading edge.
(c) Let dry for 1 hour at 75% or lower humidity. Let dry longer at humidity between 75 -
90%.
(d) Snap chalk line between leading edge center line marks made when masking off
leading edge in Step 1.D.(1)(c). Trace over chalk line with ballpoint pen.
(e) Stir adhesive.
(f) Apply second even brush coat to de-icer boot and leading edge.
(g) Let dry for 1 hour at 75% or lower humidity. Let dry longer at humidity between 75 -
90%.
(4) Bond de-icer boot as follows:
(a) Pull end of de-icer hose through air connection hole on leading edge.
(b) Position de-icer boot so de-icer boot and leading edge center lines match. See Figure
401.
NOTE: De-icer boot has a white line on back side indicating boot center line to aid
installation.
(c) Ensure de-icer air connection mates with system de-icer hose line.
(d) For slat de-icers only, apply silicone grease to aircraft supply line then connect de-icer
boot hose with suitable clamp.

30-10-40
Page 404
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(e) Attach de-icer air connection with suitable clamp.

(f) Apply vacuum at nearest suitable connection point, such as tee or elbow in aircraft
de-icing hose. Apply 6 - 10 in. Hg. vacuum with shop equipment.
NOTE: Application of vacuum is strongly recommended and makes installation
easier. However, if vacuum is not available, installation can be accomplished
without vacuum.
(g) To avoid trapped air and areas of poor adhesion, use rubber roller to bond de-icer boot
to leading edge.
(h) Dampen lint free loth with solvent. Wring cloth to remove excess solvent. Shake cloth to
remove excess solvent.
(i) If air connection is on center line, seal de-icer boot and leading edge in 1 - 3 inches
(25.4 - 76.2 mm) wide x 18 inches (457.2 mm) long section along center line, centered
on air connection. See Figure 402.
(j) If air connection is above or below center line, seal de-icer boot and leading edge in 1
- 3 inches (25.4 - 76.2 mm) radius around air connection and in curved area to center
line.
CAUTION: IF ADHESIVE IS TOO DRY OR TOO WET WHEN DE-ICER IS ROLLED
ON LEADING EDGE, POOR ADHESION CAN RESULT. CEMENT
SHOULD FEEL LIKE STICKY SIDE OF MASKING TAPE WHEN
KNUCKLE IS TAPPED ON IT. IF CEMENT DOES NOT FEEL STICKY, IT
IS TOO DRY AND SHOULD BE TACKIFIED. IF CEMENT STRINGS
WHEN KNUCKLE IS LIFTED, IT IS TOO WET AND SHOULD BE
ALLOWED TO DRY LONGER.
(k) Press de-icer boot onto leading edge and roll firmly with rubber roller.
(l) Working in 3 inches (76.2 mm) wide x 18 - 24 inches (457.2 - 609.6 mm) long sections,
seal de-icer boot and leading edge center lines and press de-icer boot to leading edge,
matching center lines. See Figure 403.
(m) Roll de-icer boot firmly with rubber roller. Lightly tension de-icer boot to avoid wrinkles.
Repeat until de-icer is bonded along entire length of center line.
NOTE: To avoid trapping air, seal in a curved area. Do not allow de-icer boot to touch
adhesive on leading edge until ready to roll de-icer boot. See Figure 404.
(n) Hold de-icer boot back to reveal center line bond. See Figure 405.
(o) Working above center line, begin at inboard end of de-icer boot and seal de-icer boot
and leading edge in an area 3 - 4 inches (76.2 - 101.6 mm) long x 24 - 36 inches (609.6
- 914.4 mm) wide, ensuring to seal tightly into fold between de-icer boot and leading
edge.
NOTE: If de-icer edges are puckered, wipe lightly along edges with lint free cloth
dampened with solvent and roll firmly.
(p) Roll de-icer onto leading edge, starting at bond line moving outward. Repeat until upper
surface of de-icer is bonded to leading edge.

30-10-40
Page 405
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CAUTION: DO NOT TRIM DE-ICER CLOSER THAN 1 INCH (25.4 MM) FROM
TUBES OR CUTOUT AREAS, AS THIS COULD RESULT IN AIR
LEAKAGE OR SEAM FAILURE.
(q) If de-icer is installed in recess, install de-icer up to edge of recess. Use hook knife to
trim de-icer edges and / or ends to fit recessed leading edge or to butt against adjacent
de-icer or aircraft structure.
(r) If de-icer has cutout, install de-icer up to cutout area. Use hook knife to trim de-icer
edges to fit or butt against aircraft structure in cutout area.
(s) Repeat Step 1.D.(4)(o) for lower surface of de-icer.
(t) Roll de-icer edges with 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) metal roller.
NOTE: If de-icer edges are puckered, wipe lightly along edges with lint free cloth
dampened with solvent and roll firmly.
(u) Remove masking tape applied in Step 1.D.(1)(b).
(5) Apply edge filler as follows:
(a) Apply two lines of masking tape bordering edges or area to be filled. Apply one line to
de-icer boot surface 0.06 - 0.125 inch (1.524 - 3.175 mm) from edge. Apply second line
of masking tape on leading edge 0.25 - 0.50 inch (6.35 - 12.7 mm) from de-icer boot
edge.
(b) Apply edge filler to fair full thickness de-icer boot edges to adjacent aircraft structure,
around cutouts, recessed edges and / or between two de-icer boots which are installed
close together.
NOTE: Width between masking tape lines may vary depending on area to be filled;
use narrowest width possible.
(c) Apply filler between tape lines, fairing surface for smooth transition.
(d) Apply filler using putty knife with light but firm pressure with long continuous strokes.
(e) Remove tape immediately after application of filler.
(f) Allow to dry per manufacturer instructions.
(6) Apply conductive edge sealer as follows:
NOTE: Edge sealer should be applied at temperatures above 55°F (13°C).
(a) Wipe any exposed 1300L adhesive with clean cloth dampened with solvent to smooth
surface.
(b) Apply flashtape on de-icer surface around de-icer boot and cutouts at least 0.25 inch
(6.35 mm) from edge. Tape should be at least 0.06 - 0.25 inch (1.524 - 6.35 mm) in from
edge filler.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove adhesive extending beyond de-icer boot edge as
this can be covered by conductive sealer.
(c) Apply masking tape on leading edge 0.125 - 0.25 inch (3.175 - 6.35 mm) outboard of
area initially cleaned and bonded, about 0.75 inch (19.05 mm) out from de-icer edge.
Form neat, straight lines to border conductive sealer application.
1 If sealer is being refurbished, ensure de-icer boot edges are free of
contamination by wiping with lint free cloth dampened with solvent.

30-10-40
Page 406
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2 If edge sealer is being applied as part of de-icer boot replacement, cleaning may
be required.
(d) Neoprene de-icer boots can use A-56B or 74-451-P conductive edge sealer. Perform
Step 1.D.(6)(f) for application of A-56B conductive edge sealer or Step 1.D.(6)(g) for
application of 74-451-P conductive edge sealer.
(e) Estane® de-icer boots can use 74-451-P or 74-451-K conductive edge sealer. Perform
Step 1.D.(6)(g) for application of 74-451-P conductive edge sealer or Step 1.D.(6)(h) for
application of 74-451-K conductive edge sealer.
(f) Apply A-56B conductive edge sealer as follows:
NOTE: Neoprene de-icer boots can use either A-56B or 74-451-P conductive edge
sealer. Estane® de-icers can use 74-451-P or 74-451-K conductive edge
sealer.
1 Stir sealer throughly to mix solids. If desired, dilute with solvent, not to exceed
20% by volume.
NOTE: One-half pint of A-56B conductive edge sealer covers approximately
155 linear feet.
2 Apply even brush coat of sealer between tape lines.
3 Remove tape as edge sealer is applied. An easy method to remove tape is to
attach ends of masking tape lines to cardboard cylinder (such as that shipped
with de-icer boot) and roll cylinder to take up two lines of tape as edge sealer is
applied.
4 For slat de-icers only, perform the following:
a Allow A-56B to cure 20 - 30 minutes at room temperature.
b Apply masking tape on de-icer using existing edges of A-56B conductive
edge sealer as tape line. Apply masking tape on leading edge 0.25 inch
(6.35 mm) aft of existing A-56B conductive edge sealer line. Form neat,
straight lines to form border for sealer application.
CAUTION: FAILURE TO MONITOR HEAT SOURCE MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGE TO NEOPRENE DE-ICER.
c Apply sealant as follows:
• Preferred method: Apply PR-1425 sealant in accordance with
manufacturer’s specifications. Cure for 24 hours at room
temperature for B-1/2. Cure for 48 hours at room temperature for B-2
• Alternate (shorter drying time) method: Apply PR-1440 sealant in
accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. Cure for 6 hours at
120 - 130°F (49 - 54°C) for B-1/2. Cure for 8 hours at 120 - 130°F (49
- 54°C) for B-2
d Remove masking tape.
(g) Apply 74-451-P conductive sealer as follows:
NOTE: Neoprene de-icer boots can use either A-56B or 74-451-P conductive edge
sealer. Estane® de-icers can use 74-451-P or 74-451-K conductive edge
sealer.

30-10-40
Page 407
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Apply making tape on perimeter of de-icer boot surface 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from
edge.
2 Apply masking tape on leading edge at least 1.75 inches (44.45 mm) outboard of
edge of tape applied to de-icer boot. Tape on leading edge must be outboard of
exposed sealant application.
3 For Estane® de-icers only, brush one even coat of primer (from 74-451-P kit) on
leading edge only, between de-icer boot edge and masking tape (not on de-icer
boot surface). Let dry for 30 minutes.
4 For neoprene de-icers only, brush one even coat of primer (from 74-451-P kit) on
bonding side of de-icer boot.
5 Thoroughly mix adhesive to blend solids.
6 Brush one even coat of adhesive between tape lines. Let dry for 15 minutes.
7 Begin on upper spanwise edge of de-icer boot. Wet back side of strip (side
without peel ply) with solvent in 15 - 20 inches (381 - 508 mm) length and press
strip onto bonded area between tape lines.
a Ensure strip contacts de-icer boot surface and primed leading edge
surface.
b Removal peel ply on breeze side of strip and roll with rubber roller.
Continue until one side of de-icer boot is edged with sealer.
8 Apply strip about 1 - 1.5 inches (25.4 - 38.1 mm) beyond de-icer boot end at
corners.
9 Repeat Step 1.D.(6)(g)6 for lower edge of de-icer boot.
10 Repeat Step 1.D.(6)(g)6 for chordwise edges of de-icer boot, overlapping strip on
top of spanwise strips. This arrangement provides aerodynamic flow to minimize
possibility of strip lifting and drag.
(h) Apply 74-451-K conductive edge sealer as follows:
NOTE: Neoprene de-icer boots can use either A-56B or 74-451-P conductive edge
sealer. Estane® de-icers can use 74-451-P or 74-451-K conductive edge
sealer.
1 Mix conductive edge sealer using the following ratio:
NOTE: Mix only the amount of sealer to be used in a 4-hour period.
• 8 ounces of cement
• 1 ounce of accelerator
2 Brush edge sealer between tape lines, ensuring it is even and continuous.
3 Remove tape immediately after applying sealer. An easy method to remove tape
is to attach ends of masking tape lines to cardboard cylinder (such as that
shipped with de-icer boot) and roll cylinder to take up two lines of tape as edge
sealer is applied.
(7) Allow de-icer boot to dry as follows:

30-10-40
Page 408
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CAUTION: FAILURE TO ALLOW RECOMMENDED DRY TIMES COULD RESULT IN

LIFTING OF DE-ICER AND / OR SHORTENED SERVICE LIFE.
(a) Drying time is 48 hours. If required, drying time can be reduced from 48 hours by
performing the following:
CAUTION: USE OF SHORTENED DRY TIME IS RECOMMENDED ONLY FOR
INSTALLATIONS ACCOMPLISHED BY EXPERIENCED AND SKILLED
INSTALLERS. SHORTENED DRY TIME IS NOT RECOMMENDED FOR
FIRST TIME OR RELATIVELY INEXPERIENCED INSTALLERS.
THE TEMPERATURE AT THE BOND LINE IS THE CRITICAL VALUE
FOR SHORTENED DRY TIME. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SPEED DRY
TIME BY APPLYING HEAT EXTERNALLY THROUGH THE DE-ICER
BOOT, AS THE DE-ICER BOOT WILL ABSORB THE HEAT AND
INSULATE THE BOND LINE FROM THE HEAT BEING APPLIED.
EXCESS HEAT CAN CAUSE DETERIORATION TO THE DE-ICER
BOOT.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THE DE-ICER BOOT BE INSPECTED FOR
SIGNS OF LIFTING IF INFLATED BEFORE 48 HOURS DRY TIME,
EVEN IF THE CRITERIA IN THE SHORTENED DRY TIME CHART ARE
MET.
1 Determine temperature and humidity at which de-icer boot installation will be
made and in which installation will dry.
2 Locate point on chart where temperature (top scale) and humidity (side scale)
intercept. See Figure 406.
3 If intercept point falls in INSTALLATION NOT RECOMMENDED area of chart, do
not install de-icer boot.
4 If intercept point falls in 24 HOUR DRY TIME area of chart, allow 24 hours dry
time before inflating de-icer boot.
5 If intercept point falls in CENTRAL AREA of chart, read recommended dry time
on dry time scale (bottom scale) and allow at least this dry time before inflating
de-icer boot.
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.B.(2)(b).
(3) After drying time, perform Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment /
Test or Code 301001.
(4) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-40
Page 409
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DE-ICER CENTERLINE
(WHITE)
CENTERLINE OF
AIRFOIL
LEADING EDGE

DE-ICER AIR
CONNECTION

NOSE

INITIAL INSTALLATION AREA

82886N00

Positioning De-icer
Figure 401

30-10-40
Page 410
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

82887N00

Bonding Air Connection to Center Line

Figure 402

30-10-40
Page 411
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

82888N00

Bonding Center Line

Figure 403

30-10-40
Page 412
October 15/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

82889N00

Curved Bonding Area

Figure 404

30-10-40
Page 413
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DE-ICER

BOND LINE

REACTIVATED AREAS

82890N00

Revealing Center Line Bond

Figure 405

30-10-40
Page 414
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TEMPERATURE ( F )

90 80 70 65 60 55 50
100

90

24 HOUR DRY TIME

80

70

60
RECOMMENDED

RECOMMENDED
INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION
HUMIDITY (%)

50
NOT

NOT
40
CENTRAL AREA
30

20

10

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

DRY TIME AFTER INSTALLATION (HRS)

80187N00

Shortened Dry Time

Figure 406

30-10-40
Page 415
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2. Silver Estane De-icer Boots — Removal / Installation

A. General
This procedure applies only to the silver Estane® pneumatic de-icer boots. The silver Estane®
de-icer boots are identifiable by part number on the boots and can be identified by part number in
the illustrated parts catalog. For installation of other boot types, see Black De-icer Boots - Removal
/ Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301007, Silver Urethane De-icer Boots -
Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301061 or FASTboots - Removal /
Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301071.
Silver Estane® pneumatic de-icer boots are installed on the leading edges of the wing and
horizontal stabilizer and Krueger flaps. Wing boots are divided into an inboard section on the fixed
portion of the leading edge and outboard section on the leading edge slats and Krueger flaps. The
de-icer boots must be installed symmetrically. The silver de-icer boots (Estane®, urethane or
FASTboot®) must be installed symmetrically. For example, if black de-icer boot is replaced with
silver boot on the left slat, the right slat must also be replaced with a silver boot.
The silver Estane® de-icers use a bonding system that consists of an adhesive cement and a
tackifying solvent to bond the de-icers to the aircraft surface.
B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

Adhesive brush, 3 inches (76.2 mm), boar’s bristle ........................................................... Standard

Chalk line ............................................................................................................................ Standard
Circuit breaker safety clips .................................................................... GSE2400984 or equivalent
Edge sealer brush, 3 inches (76.2 mm), pure bristle ......................................................... Standard
Hook knife ........................................................................................................................... Standard
Metal roller, 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) wide x 2 inches (50.8 mm) diameter .............................. Standard
Putty knife ........................................................................................................................... Standard
Rubber roller, 2.5 inches (63.5 mm) wide x 2 inches (50.8 mm) diameter ....................... Standard
Spray bottle ......................................................................................................................... Standard
Straight edge ....................................................................................................................... Standard
Vacuum source, 6 - 10 in. Hg. ............................................................................................ Standard
CONSUMABLES
Abrasive paper .................................................................................................................... TT-4-248
Adhesive ................................................................................................................ 1300L (see Note)
Cotton gloves ...................................................................................................................... Standard
Gap filler (aircraft structure) ............................................ PRC1422, PRC1425 (B-1/2) or PRC1750
Flashtape 1.0 inch x 0.001 inch (25.4 x 0.0254 mm) ............................. Northern Fiberglass Sales
Leading edge stripper ............................................................................ Toluene or Peerco No. 321
Lint free cloth ...................................................................................................................... Standard
Masking tape, 1.0 inch (25.4 mm) ...................................................................................... Standard
Mixing cup ........................................................................................................................... Standard
Silicone grease ................................................................................... AMS-G-4343 (Molykote 55M)
Silver conductive edge sealer kit (pint) ........................................................................... 74-451-R-1
Silver conductive edge sealer kit (quart) ........................................................................ 74-451-R-2
Silver edge/gap filler, pint (cutout and recessed edges) ................................................ 74-451-Q-1
Silver edge/gap filler, quart (cutout and recessed edges) .............................................. 74-451-Q-2
Solvent .................................................................................................................. Toluene TT-T-548
Stir stick .............................................................................................................................. Standard

30-10-40
Page 416
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

NOTE: Do not use Toluene-free Contact Rubber Adhesive 1300 L. The only approved adhesive
for de-icer boot installation is Neoprene High Performance Rubber and Gasket Adhesive
1300L.
(1) Reference(s)
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 301001
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Pull, tag and safety clip the following circuit breaker(s):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

SURFACE DE-ICE ALT Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
SURFACE DE-ICE NORM Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

C. Removal
WARNING: MANY OF THE MATERIALS SPECIFIED HAVE SIGNIFICANT OCCUPATIONAL
SAFETY, HEALTH OR ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS RELATED TO THEIR
USE. SAFETY DATA SHEETS SHALL BE CONSULTED FOR ALL MATERIALS TO
DETERMINE THE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS CONCERNING
OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE PRECAUTIONS. IT IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY
OF THE USER TO ENSURE PROTECTION FROM INJURY OR EXPOSURE, SAFE
APPLICATION OF MATERIALS AND COMPLIANCE WITH ANY FEDERAL, STATE
OR LOCAL REGULATIONS REGARDING THE USE OF ANY OF THE MATERIALS
SPECIFIED.
CAUTION: ENSURE LADDERS DO NOT RUB AGAINST DE-ICER BOOTS DURING
MAINTENANCE. DAMAGE TO DE-ICER BOOTS COULD RESULT.
(1) Use spray bottle to apply solvent to upper corner of boot while using tension to peel back
corner of boot.
(2) Work with solvent and tension to separate boot from leading edge for width of 4 inches (101.6
mm) along boot’s entire upper leading edge.
(3) If boot is to be preserved, continue to work with solvent and tension along upper edge, pulling
boot toward center line. Then work from center line toward lower edge until de-icer is
completely removed.
CAUTION: WHEN SCORING BOOT FOR REMOVAL, DO NOT DAMAGE LEADING
EDGE. SCORE ONLY THROUGH FABRIC CARCASS TO FACILITATE
REMOVAL.
(4) If boot is to be discarded, remove by scoring and peeling boot in strips parallel to tubes. Work
with solvent and tension to remove strips individually.
CAUTION: ALL STRIPPER RESIDUE MUST BE REMOVED BEFORE BOOT
INSTALLATION. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INADEQUATE
ADHESION.
(5) Remove residual adhesive with leading edge stripper (Peerco No. 321 is preferred).

30-10-40
Page 417
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(6) Clean area thoroughly with solvent.

D. Installation
WARNING: MANY OF THE MATERIALS SPECIFIED HAVE SIGNIFICANT OCCUPATIONAL
SAFETY, HEALTH OR ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS RELATED TO THEIR
USE. SAFETY DATA SHEETS SHALL BE CONSULTED FOR ALL MATERIALS TO
DETERMINE THE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS CONCERNING
OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE PRECAUTIONS. IT IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY
OF THE USER TO ENSURE PROTECTION FROM INJURY OR EXPOSURE, SAFE
APPLICATION OF MATERIALS AND COMPLIANCE WITH ANY FEDERAL, STATE
OR LOCAL REGULATIONS REGARDING THE USE OF ANY OF THE MATERIALS
SPECIFIED.
CAUTION: DUE TO THE COMPLEXITY OF THIS BOOT (MANY BENDS AND ANGLES), IT IS
EASY TO END UP WITH INSUFFICIENT MATERIAL DURING INSTALLATION.
LEAVE AS MUCH MATERIAL AS POSSIBLE ON THE BOOT DURING INITIAL
TRIMMING AND UNTIL ENTIRE BOOT IS INSTALLED. TRIM AS NEEDED DURING
FINAL TRIMMING UPON INSTALLATION.
NOTE: Installer should wear clean cloth gloves during installation to prevent skin oils from staining
de-icer surface.
Installer should minimize touching or rubbing surface of de-icer during installation.
(1) Prepare leading edges as follows:
(a) Dry fit de-icer boot on leading edge. Ensure de-icer air connection fits in air connection
hole in leading edge and cutouts are properly aligned.
(b) Use de-icer boot as template to mask off installation area with 1 inch (25.4 mm)
masking tape. For nonrecessed de-icers, allow at least 1 inch (25.4 mm) extra around
edge.
(c) Mark de-icer center line on masking tape on each end masked area.
NOTE: De-icer boot center line may not correspond with center line of aircraft leading
edge. When dry fitting de-icer boot on the inboard fixed leading edge, ensure
the lower line on back of boot lines up with edge of flap cut out on leading
edge before marking boot center line on the leading edge.
(d) Remove paint and primer within masked area with stripper (Peerco No. 321 is
preferred). De-icer boot can be installed on alodine or anodized aluminum surfaces and
on composite surfaces with primer.
(e) Abrade aluminum and composite surfaces as follows:
1 Composite surfaces are to be abraded with No. 240 aluminum oxide abrasive
paper and aluminum surfaces with fine No. 290 - 320 aluminum oxide abrasive
paper.
2 Remove sanding particles by using pressurized air or dry lint free cloth.
(f) Wipe masked area with solvent at least twice. Wipe dry with clean lint free cloth before
solvent evaporates.
(g) Apply aircraft structure gap filler to skin splice gaps on leading edge as required.
(2) Prepare de-icer boot as follows:

30-10-40
Page 418
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CAUTION: DO NOT MAR SURFACE OF DE-ICER. SILVER COATING MAY RUB OFF IF
DE-ICER IS HANDLED EXCESSIVELY. INSTALLER SHOULD WEAR CLEAN
CLOTH GLOVES TO AVOID COSMETIC CONTAMINATION WITH GREASE
OR SOLVENTS DURING PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION.
DO NOT USE MEK TO CLEAN DE-ICERS. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
(a) Moisten clean lint free cloth with solvent and wipe back side of de-icer at least twice.
Change cloth frequently to avoid contamination.
(3) Apply adhesive as follows:
WARNING: 1300L ADHESIVE CONTAINS METHYL ETHYL KETONE WHICH IS
EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE. EXTINGUISH OPEN FLAMES. AVOID SPARKS.
USE IN WELL VENTILATED AREA. AVOID SKIN CONTACT AND / OR
PROLONGED BREATHING OF VAPORS. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND / OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION: DO NOT INSTALL AT TEMPERATURE BELOW 50°F (10°C) OR IN HUMIDITY
HIGHER THAN 90%, AS PROPER ADHESION MAY NOT BE OBTAINED
REGARDLESS OF DRY TIME ALLOWED. DRY FIT DE-ICER BOOT TO
ASSURE FIT BEFORE APPLYING ADHESIVE.
DO NOT APPLY ADHESIVE BY SPRAYING, AS COATING MAY BE TOO THIN
OR UNEVEN TO PROVIDE PROPER ADHESION. SPRAY APPLICATION OF
EXTRA ADHESIVE COATS DOES NOT COMPENSATE FOR THINNER
CONSISTENCY.
SILVER DE-ICER CAN BE DAMAGED BY MEK CONTAINED IN 1300L
CEMENT. ENSURE 1300L DOES NOT CONTACT BREEZE SIDE OF DE-ICER
DURING INSTALLATION AS IT MAY MAR DE-ICER SURFACE.
DO NOT USE TOLUENE-FREE CONTACT RUBBER ADHESIVE 1300 L AS IT
HAS A SIGNIFICANTLY LOWER ADHESIVE STRENGTH. THE ONLY
APPROVED ADHESIVE FOR DE-ICER BOOT INSTALLATION IS NEOPRENE
HIGH PERFORMANCE RUBBER AND GASKET ADHESIVE 1300L.
NOTE: Installer should wear clean cloth gloves during installation to prevent skin oils from
staining de-icer surface.
Installer should minimize touching or rubbing surface of de-icer during installation.
(a) Thoroughly mix adhesive to blend solids.
(b) Apply one even brush coat to back side of de-icer and to leading edge.
(c) Let dry for 1 hour at 75% or lower humidity. Let dry longer at humidity between 75 -
90%.
(d) Snap chalk line between leading edge center line marks made in Step 2.D.(1)(c). Trace
over chalk line with ballpoint pen. Wipe leading edge to remove chalk dust.
(e) Stir adhesive.
(f) Apply second even brush coat to de-icer boot and leading edge.
(g) Let dry for 1 hour at 75% or lower humidity. Let dry longer at humidity between 75 -
90%.
(4) Bond de-icer boot as follows:

30-10-40
Page 419
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(a) Pull end of de-icer hose through air connection hole on leading edge.
(b) Position de-icer boot so de-icer boot and leading edge center lines match. See Figure
401.
NOTE: De-icer boot has a white line on back side indicating boot center line to aid
installation.
(c) For slat de-icers only, apply silicone grease to aircraft supply line then connect de-icer
boot hose with suitable clamp.
(d) Attach de-icer air connection with suitable clamp.
(e) Apply vacuum at nearest suitable connection point, such as tee or elbow in aircraft
de-icing hose. Apply 6 - 10 in. Hg. vacuum with shop equipment.
NOTE: Application of vacuum is strongly recommended and makes installation
easier. However, if vacuum is not available, installation can be accomplished
without vacuum.
(f) To avoid trapped air and areas of poor adhesion, use of rubber roller to bond de-icer
boot to leading edge.
(g) Dampen cloth with solvent. Wring cloth to remove excess solvent. Shake cloth to
remove excess solvent.
(h) If air connection is on center line, tackify cement on de-icer boot and leading edge in 1
- 3 inches (25.4 - 76.2 mm) wide x 18 inches (457.2 mm) long section along center line,
centered on air connection. See Figure 402.
(i) If air connection is above or below center line, tackify cement on de-icer boot and
leading edge in 1 - 3 inches (25.4 - 76.2 mm) radius around air connection and in
curved area to center line.
CAUTION: IF ADHESIVE IS TOO DRY OR TOO WET WHEN DE-ICER IS ROLLED
ON LEADING EDGE, POOR ADHESION CAN RESULT. CEMENT
SHOULD FEEL LIKE STICKY SIDE OF MASKING TAPE WHEN
KNUCKLE IS TAPPED ON IT. IF CEMENT DOES NOT FEEL STICKY, IT
IS TOO DRY AND SHOULD BE TACKIFIED. IF CEMENT STRINGS
WHEN KNUCKLE IS LIFTED, IT IS TOO WET AND SHOULD BE
ALLOWED TO DRY LONGER.
(j) Press de-icer boot onto leading edge and roll firmly with rubber roller.
(k) Working in 3 inches (76.2 mm) wide x 18 - 24 inches (457.2 - 609.6 mm) long sections,
seal de-icer boot and leading edge center lines and press de-icer boot to leading edge,
matching center lines. See Figure 403.
(l) Roll de-icer boot firmly with rubber roller. Lightly tension de-icer boot to avoid wrinkles.
Repeat until de-icer is bonded along entire length of center line.
NOTE: To avoid trapping air when tackifying in curved area, do not allow de-icer boot
to touch adhesive on leading edge until ready to roll de-icer boot. See Figure
404.
(m) Hold de-icer boot back to reveal center line bond. See Figure 405.
(n) Working above center line, begin at inboard end of de-icer boot and seal de-icer boot
and leading edge in an area 3 - 4 inches (76.2 - 101.6 mm) long x 24 - 36 inches (609.6

30-10-40
Page 420
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

- 914.4 mm) wide, ensuring to tackify tightly into fold between de-icer boot and leading
edge.
NOTE: If de-icer edges are puckered, wipe lightly along edges with lint free cloth
dampened with solvent and roll firmly.
(o) Roll de-icer onto leading edge, starting at bond line moving outward. Repeat until upper
surface of de-icer is bonded to leading edge.
CAUTION: DO NOT TRIM DE-ICER CLOSER THAN 1 INCH (25.4 MM) FROM
TUBES OR CUTOUT AREAS, AS THIS COULD RESULT IN AIR
LEAKAGE OR SEAM FAILURE.
(p) If de-icer is installed in recess, install de-icer up to edge of recess. Use hook knife to
trim de-icer edges and / or ends to fit recessed leading edge or to butt against adjacent
de-icer or aircraft structure.
(q) If de-icer has cutout, install de-icer up to cutout area. Use hook knife to trim de-icer
edges to fit or butt against aircraft structure in cutout area.
(r) Repeat Step 2.D.(4)(n) for lower surface of de-icer.
(s) Roll de-icer edges with 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) metal roller.
NOTE: If de-icer edges are puckered, wipe lightly along edges with lint free cloth
dampened with solvent and roll firmly.
(t) Remove masking tape applied in Step 2.D.(1)(b).
(5) Apply silver edge / gap filler for recessed de-icer edges and cutouts as follows:
CAUTION: OPTIMUM TEMPERATURE RANGE FOR PROPER CURING OF GAP FILLER
IS 68 - 86°F (20 - 30°C).
NOTE: Width between tape lines may vary depending on area to be filled. Use narrowest
width possible.
Silver edge / gap filler kits are designed to flair full thickness de-icer edges to
adjacent aircraft structure, around cutouts, recessed edges and / or between two
de-icers that are installed close together.
(a) Apply two lines of masking tape bordering edges or area to be filled. Apply one line to
de-icer boot surface 0.06 - 0.125 inch (1.524 - 3.175 mm) from edge. Apply second line
of masking tape on leading edge 0.25 - 0.50 inch (6.35 - 12.7 mm) from de-icer boot
edge.
(b) Mix silver edge / gap filler sealer and accelerator thoroughly by weight or by volume
using one of the following ratios:
NOTE: Mix only amount that can be used in 10 minutes.
1 Weight Ratio
• 100.0 parts of part A
• 61.0 parts of part B
2 Volume Ratio
• 100.0 parts of part A
• 54.9 parts of part B
(c) Apply silver edge / gap filler using putty knife between tape lines. Use light but firm

30-10-40
Page 421
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

pressure with long continuous strokes.

NOTE: Viscosity of gap filler will increase rapidly after approximately 10 minutes
when applied in recommended temperature range, limiting flow of filler edges,
if tape is removed after this time. Viscosity will increase much faster at higher
temperatures.
(d) Remove tape immediately after application of filler.
(e) Allow to dry until tack free (approximately 6 hours).
(6) Apply conductive edge sealer as follows:
CAUTION: CONDUCTIVE EDGE SEALER SHOULD BE APPLIED AT TEMPERATURES
ABOVE 55°F (13°C).
(a) Wipe any exposed adhesive with clean cloth dampened with solvent to smooth surface.
(b) Apply flashtape on de-icer surface around de-icer boot and cutouts at least 0.25 inch
(6.35 mm) from edge. Tape should be applied at least 0.06 - 0.25 inch (1.524 - 6.35
mm) from edge filler.
(c) Apply masking tape on leading edge 0.125 - 0.25 inch (3.175 - 6.35 mm) outboard of
area initially cleaned and bonded, about 0.75 inch (19.05 mm) out from de-icer edge.
Form neat, straight lines to border conductive sealer application.
NOTE: If conductive edge sealer is being refurbished, ensure de-icer boot edges are
free of contamination by wiping with lint free cloth dampened with solvent.
If conductive edge sealer is being applied as part of de-icer boot replacement,
cleaning may not be required.
(d) Mix edge sealer and accelerator thoroughly by weight or by volume using one of the
following ratios:
NOTE: Mix only amount of edge sealer to be used in 4 hour period.
1 Weight Ratio
• 100 parts edge sealer
• 5.6 parts accelerator
2 Volume Ratio
• 100 parts edge sealer
• 6.3 parts accelerator
(e) Brush conductive edge sealer between tape lines. Ensure application is even and
continuous.
(f) Remove tape immediately after applying edge sealer.
(7) Allow de-icer boot to dry as follows:
CAUTION: FAILURE TO ALLOW RECOMMENDED DRY TIMES COULD RESULT IN
LIFTING OF DE-ICER AND / OR SHORTENED SERVICE LIFE.
(a) Drying time is 48 hours. If required, drying time can be reduced from 48 hours by
performing the following:

30-10-40
Page 422
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CAUTION: USE OF SHORTENED DRY TIME IS RECOMMENDED ONLY FOR

INSTALLATIONS ACCOMPLISHED BY EXPERIENCED AND SKILLED
INSTALLERS. SHORTENED DRY TIME IS NOT RECOMMENDED FOR
FIRST TIME OR RELATIVELY INEXPERIENCED INSTALLERS.
THE TEMPERATURE AT THE BOND LINE IS THE CRITICAL VALUE
FOR SHORTENED DRY TIME. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SPEED DRY
TIME BY APPLYING HEAT EXTERNALLY THROUGH THE DE-ICER
BOOT, AS THE DE-ICER BOOT WILL ABSORB THE HEAT AND
INSULATE THE BOND LINE FROM THE HEAT BEING APPLIED.
EXCESS HEAT CAN CAUSE DETERIORATION TO THE DE-ICER
BOOT.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THE DE-ICER BOOT BE INSPECTED FOR
SIGNS OF LIFTING IF INFLATED BEFORE 48 HOURS DRY TIME,
EVEN IF THE CRITERIA IN THE SHORTENED DRY TIME CHART ARE
MET.
1 Determine temperature and humidity at which de-icer boot installation will be
made and in which installation will dry.
2 Locate point on chart where temperature (top scale) and humidity (side scale)
intercept. See Figure 406.
3 If intercept point falls in INSTALLATION NOT RECOMMENDED area of chart, do
not install de-icer boot.
4 If intercept point falls in 24 HOUR DRY TIME area of chart, allow 24 hours dry
time before inflating de-icer boot.
5 If intercept point falls in CENTRAL AREA of chart, read recommended dry time
on dry time scale (bottom scale) and allow at least this dry time before inflating
de-icer boot.
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 2.B.(2)(b).
(3) After drying time, perform Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment /
Test or Code 301001.
(4) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.
3. Silver Urethane De-icer Boots — Removal / Installation
A. General
This procedure applies only to the silver urethane (gray) pneumatic de-icer boots. The silver
urethane de-icer boots are identifiable by part number on the boots and can be identified by part
number in the illustrated parts catalog. For installation of other boot types, see Black De-icer Boots
- Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301007, Silver Estane De-icer
Boots - Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301051 or FASTboots -
Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301071.
Silver urethane pneumatic de-icer boots are installed on the leading edges of the wing and
horizontal stabilizer and Krueger flaps. Wing boots are divided into an inboard section on the fixed
portion of the leading edge and outboard section on the leading edge slats and Krueger flaps. The

30-10-40
Page 423
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

silver de-icer boots (Estane®, urethane or FASTboot®) must be installed symmetrically. For
example, if black de-icer boot is replaced with silver boot on the left slat, the right slat must also be
replaced with a silver boot.
The silver urethane de-icers use a bonding system that consists of an adhesive cement and a
tackifying solvent to bond the de-icers to the aircraft surface.
B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

Adhesive brush, 3 inches (76.2 mm), boar’s bristle ........................................................... Standard

Chalk line ............................................................................................................................ Standard
Circuit breaker safety clips .................................................................... GSE2400984 or equivalent
Edge sealer brush, 3 inches (76.2 mm), pure bristle ......................................................... Standard
Hook knife ........................................................................................................................... Standard
Metal roller, 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) wide x 2 inches (50.8 mm) diameter .............................. Standard
Putty knife ........................................................................................................................... Standard
Rubber roller, 2.5 inches (63.5 mm) wide x 2 inches (50.8 mm) diameter ....................... Standard
Spray bottle ......................................................................................................................... Standard
Straight edge ....................................................................................................................... Standard
Vacuum source, 6 - 10 in. Hg. ............................................................................................ Standard
CONSUMABLES
Abrasive paper .................................................................................................................... TT-4-248
Adhesive ................................................................................................................ 1300L (see Note)
Cotton gloves ...................................................................................................................... Standard
Edge filler ........................................................................................................ Proseal P/S 870B-1/2
Gap filler (aircraft structure) ............................................ PRC1422, PRC1425 (B-1/2) or PRC1750
Leading edge stripper ......................................... Methyl Ethyl Ketone, Peerco No. 321 or Toluene
Lint free cloth ...................................................................................................................... Standard
Masking tape, 1.0 inch (25.4 mm) ...................................................................................... Standard
Mixing cup ........................................................................................................................... Standard
Silicone grease ................................................................................... AMS-G-4343 (Molykote 55M)
Silver conductive edge sealer kit (pint) ......................................................................... 74-451-AQ1
Silver conductive edge sealer kit (quart) ....................................................................... 74-451-AQ2
Solvent .................................................................................................................. Toluene TT-T-548
Stir stick .............................................................................................................................. Standard
NOTE: Do not use Toluene-free Contact Rubber Adhesive 1300 L. The only approved adhesive
for de-icer boot installation is Neoprene High Performance Rubber and Gasket Adhesive
1300L.
(1) Reference(s)
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 301001
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Pull, tag and safety clip the following circuit breaker(s):

30-10-40
Page 424
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

SURFACE DE-ICE ALT Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
SURFACE DE-ICE NORM Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

C. Removal
WARNING: MANY OF THE MATERIALS SPECIFIED HAVE SIGNIFICANT OCCUPATIONAL
SAFETY, HEALTH OR ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS RELATED TO THEIR
USE. SAFETY DATA SHEETS SHALL BE CONSULTED FOR ALL MATERIALS TO
DETERMINE THE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS CONCERNING
OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE PRECAUTIONS. IT IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY
OF THE USER TO ENSURE PROTECTION FROM INJURY OR EXPOSURE, SAFE
APPLICATION OF MATERIALS AND COMPLIANCE WITH ANY FEDERAL, STATE
OR LOCAL REGULATIONS REGARDING THE USE OF ANY OF THE MATERIALS
SPECIFIED.
CAUTION: ENSURE LADDERS DO NOT RUB AGAINST DE-ICER BOOTS DURING
MAINTENANCE. DAMAGE TO DE-ICER BOOTS COULD RESULT.
(1) Use spray bottle to apply solvent to upper corner of boot while using tension to peel back
corner of boot.
(2) Work with solvent and tension to separate boot from leading edge for width of 4 inches (101.6
mm) along boot’s entire upper leading edge.
(3) If boot is to be preserved, continue to work with solvent and tension along upper edge, pulling
boot toward center line. Then work from center line toward lower edge until de-icer is
completely removed.
CAUTION: WHEN SCORING BOOT FOR REMOVAL, DO NOT DAMAGE LEADING
EDGE. SCORE ONLY THROUGH FABRIC CARCASS TO FACILITATE
REMOVAL.
(4) If boot is to be discarded, remove by scoring and peeling boot in strips parallel to tubes. Work
with solvent and tension to remove strips individually.
CAUTION: ALL STRIPPER RESIDUE MUST BE REMOVED BEFORE BOOT
INSTALLATION. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INADEQUATE
ADHESION.
(5) Remove residual adhesive with leading edge stripper (Peerco No. 321 is preferred).
(6) Clean area thoroughly with solvent.

30-10-40
Page 425
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

D. Installation
WARNING: MANY OF THE MATERIALS SPECIFIED HAVE SIGNIFICANT OCCUPATIONAL
SAFETY, HEALTH OR ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS RELATED TO THEIR
USE. SAFETY DATA SHEETS SHALL BE CONSULTED FOR ALL MATERIALS TO
DETERMINE THE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS CONCERNING
OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE PRECAUTIONS. IT IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY
OF THE USER TO ENSURE PROTECTION FROM INJURY OR EXPOSURE, SAFE
APPLICATION OF MATERIALS AND COMPLIANCE WITH ANY FEDERAL, STATE
OR LOCAL REGULATIONS REGARDING THE USE OF ANY OF THE MATERIALS
SPECIFIED.
CAUTION: DO NOT INSTALL AT TEMPERATURE BELOW 50°F (10°C) OR IN HUMIDITY
HIGHER THAN 90%, AS PROPER ADHESION MAY NOT BE OBTAINED
REGARDLESS OF DRY TIME ALLOWED.
DUE TO THE COMPLEXITY OF THIS BOOT (MANY BENDS AND ANGLES), IT IS
EASY TO END UP WITH INSUFFICIENT MATERIAL DURING INSTALLATION.
LEAVE AS MUCH MATERIAL AS POSSIBLE ON THE BOOT DURING INITIAL
TRIMMING AND UNTIL ENTIRE BOOT IS INSTALLED. TRIM AS NEEDED DURING
FINAL TRIMMING UPON INSTALLATION.
(1) Prepare leading edges as follows:
(a) Dry fit de-icer boot on leading edge. Ensure de-icer air connection fits in air connection
hole in leading edge and cutouts are properly aligned.
(b) Use de-icer boot as template to mask off installation area with 1 inch (25.4 mm)
masking tape. For nonrecessed de-icers, allow at least 1 inch (25.4 mm) extra around
edge.
(c) Mark de-icer center line on masking tape on each end masked area.
NOTE: De-icer boot center line may not correspond with center line of aircraft leading
edge. When dry fitting de-icer boot on the inboard fixed leading edge, ensure
the lower line on back of boot lines up with edge of flap cut out on leading
edge before marking boot center line on the leading edge.
(d) Remove paint and primer within masked area with stripper (Peerco No. 321 is
preferred). De-icer boot can be installed on alodine or anodized aluminum surfaces and
on composite surfaces with primer.
(e) Abrade aluminum and composite surfaces as follows:
1 Composite surfaces are to be abraded with No. 240 aluminum oxide abrasive
paper and aluminum surfaces with fine No. 290 - 320 aluminum oxide abrasive
paper.
2 Remove sanding particles by using pressurized air or dry lint free cloth.
(f) Wipe masked area with solvent at least twice. Wipe dry with clean lint free cloth before
solvent evaporates.
(g) Apply aircraft structure gap filler to skin splice gaps on leading edge as required.
(2) Prepare de-icer boot as follows:
(a) Moisten clean lint free cloth with solvent and wipe back side of de-icer at least twice.
Change cloth frequently to avoid recontamination.

30-10-40
Page 426
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(3) Apply adhesive as follows:

WARNING: 1300L ADHESIVE CONTAINS METHYL ETHYL KETONE WHICH IS
EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE. EXTINGUISH OPEN FLAMES. AVOID SPARKS.
USE IN WELL VENTILATED AREA. AVOID SKIN CONTACT AND / OR
PROLONGED BREATHING OF VAPORS. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND / OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION: DO NOT INSTALL AT TEMPERATURE BELOW 50°F (10°C) OR IN HUMIDITY
HIGHER THAN 90%, AS PROPER ADHESION MAY NOT BE OBTAINED
REGARDLESS OF DRY TIME ALLOWED. DRY FIT DE-ICER BOOT TO
ASSURE FIT BEFORE APPLYING ADHESIVE.
DRY FIT DE-ICER TO ASSURE FIT BEFORE APPLYING CEMENT.
DO NOT APPLY ADHESIVE BY SPRAYING, AS COATING MAY BE TOO THIN
OR UNEVEN TO PROVIDE PROPER ADHESION. SPRAY APPLICATION OF
EXTRA ADHESIVE COATS DOES NOT COMPENSATE FOR THINNER
CONSISTENCY.
DO NOT USE TOLUENE-FREE CONTACT RUBBER ADHESIVE 1300 L AS IT
HAS A SIGNIFICANTLY LOWER ADHESIVE STRENGTH. THE ONLY
APPROVED ADHESIVE FOR DE-ICER BOOT INSTALLATION IS NEOPRENE
HIGH PERFORMANCE RUBBER AND GASKET ADHESIVE 1300L.
(a) Thoroughly mix adhesive to blend solids.
(b) Apply one even brush coat to back side of de-icer and to leading edge.
(c) Let dry for 1 hour at 75% or lower humidity. Let dry longer at humidity between 75 -
90%.
(d) Snap chalk line between leading edge center line marks made in Step 3.D.(1)(c). Trace
over chalk line with ballpoint pen. Wipe leading edge to remove chalk dust.
(e) Stir adhesive.
(f) Apply second even brush coat to de-icer boot and leading edge.
(g) Let dry for 1 hour at 75% or lower humidity. Let dry longer at humidity between 75 -
90%.
(4) Bond de-icer boot as follows:
(a) Pull end of de-icer hose through air connection hole on leading edge.
(b) Position de-icer boot so de-icer boot and leading edge center lines match. See Figure
401.
NOTE: De-icer boot has a white line on back side indicating boot center line to aid
installation.
(c) Ensure de-icer air connection mates with system de-icer hose line.
(d) For slat de-icers only, apply silicone grease to aircraft supply line then connect de-icer
boot hose with suitable clamp.
(e) Attach de-icer air connection with suitable clamp.
(f) Apply vacuum at nearest suitable connection point, such as tee or elbow in aircraft
de-icing hose. Apply 6 - 10 in. Hg. vacuum with shop equipment.

30-10-40
Page 427
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

NOTE: Application of vacuum is strongly recommended and makes installation

easier. However, if vacuum is not available, installation can be accomplished
without vacuum.
(g) To avoid trapped air and areas of poor adhesion, use rubber roller to bond de-icer boot
to leading edge.
(h) Dampen cloth with solvent. Wring cloth to remove excess solvent. Shake cloth to
remove excess solvent.
(i) If air connection is on center line, tackify cement on de-icer boot and leading edge in 1
- 3 inches (25.4 - 76.2 mm) wide x 18 inches (457.2 mm) long section along center line,
centered on air connection.
(j) If air connection is above or below center line, tackify cement on de-icer boot and
leading edge in 1 - 3 inches (25.4 - 76.2 mm) radius around air connection and in
curved area to center line. See Figure 402.
CAUTION: IF ADHESIVE IS TOO DRY OR TOO WET WHEN DE-ICER IS ROLLED
ON LEADING EDGE, POOR ADHESION CAN RESULT. CEMENT
SHOULD FEEL LIKE STICKY SIDE OF MASKING TAPE WHEN
KNUCKLE IS TAPPED ON IT. IF CEMENT DOES NOT FEEL STICKY, IT
IS TOO DRY AND SHOULD BE TACKIFIED. IF CEMENT STRINGS
WHEN KNUCKLE IS LIFTED, IT IS TOO WET AND SHOULD BE
ALLOWED TO DRY LONGER.
(k) Press de-icer boot onto leading edge and roll firmly with rubber roller.
(l) Working in 3 inches (76.2 mm) wide x 18 - 24 inches (457.2 - 609.6 mm) long sections,
seal de-icer boot and leading edge center lines and press de-icer boot to leading edge,
matching center lines. See Figure 403.
(m) Roll de-icer boot firmly with rubber roller. Lightly tension de-icer boot to avoid wrinkles.
Repeat until de-icer is bonded along entire length of center line.
NOTE: To avoid trapping air when tackifying in curved area, do not allow de-icer boot
to touch adhesive on leading edge until ready to roll de-icer boot. See Figure
404.
(n) Hold de-icer boot back to reveal center line bond. See Figure 405.
(o) Working above center line, begin at inboard end of de-icer boot and seal de-icer boot
and leading edge in an area 3 - 4 inches (76.2 - 101.6 mm) long x 24 - 36 inches (609.6
- 914.4 mm) wide, ensuring to tackify tightly into fold between de-icer boot and leading
edge.
NOTE: If de-icer edges are puckered, wipe lightly along edges with lint free cloth
dampened with solvent and roll firmly.
(p) Roll de-icer onto leading edge, starting at bond line moving outward. Repeat until upper
surface of de-icer is bonded to leading edge.
CAUTION: DO NOT TRIM DE-ICER CLOSER THAN 1 INCH (25.4 MM) FROM
TUBES OR CUTOUT AREAS, AS THIS COULD RESULT IN AIR
LEAKAGE OR SEAM FAILURE.
(q) If de-icer is installed in recess, install de-icer up to edge of recess. Use hook knife to
trim de-icer edges and / or ends to fit recessed leading edge or to butt against adjacent
de-icer or aircraft structure.

30-10-40
Page 428
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(r) If de-icer has cutout, install de-icer up to cutout area. Use hook knife to trim de-icer
edges to fit or butt against aircraft structure in cutout area.
(s) Repeat Step 3.D.(4)(o) for lower surface of de-icer.
(t) Roll de-icer edges with 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) metal roller.
NOTE: If de-icer edges are puckered, wipe lightly along edges with lint free cloth
dampened with solvent and roll firmly.
(u) Remove masking tape applied in Step 3.D.(1)(b).
(5) Apply edge filler for recessed de-icer edges and cutouts as follows:
NOTE: Width between tape lines may vary depending on area to be filled. Use narrowest
width possible.
(a) Apply two lines of masking tape bordering edges or area to be filled. Apply one line to
de-icer boot surface 0.06 - 0.125 inch (1.524 - 3.175 mm) from edge. Apply second line
of masking tape on leading edge 0.25 - 0.50 inch (6.35 - 12.7 mm) from de-icer boot
edge.
(b) Mix edge filler sealer and accelerator thoroughly by volume using of the following ratio:
NOTE: Mix only amount that can be used in 30 minutes.
1 Volume Ratio
• 17 parts of part A
• 100 parts of part B
(c) Apply edge filler using putty knife between tape lines. Use light but firm pressure with
long continuous strokes.
(d) Remove tape immediately after application of filler.
(6) Apply conductive edge sealer as follows:
CAUTION: CONDUCTIVE EDGE SEALER SHOULD BE APPLIED AT TEMPERATURES
ABOVE 55°F (13°C).
(a) Wipe any exposed adhesive with clean cloth dampened with solvent to smooth surface.
(b) Apply masking tape on de-icer surface around de-icer boot and cutouts at least 0.25
inch (6.35 mm) from edge. Tape should be applied at least 0.06 - 0.25 inch (1.524 - 6.35
mm) from edge filler.
(c) Apply masking tape on leading edge 0.125 - 0.25 inch (3.175 - 6.35 mm) outboard of
area initially cleaned and bonded, about 0.75 inch (19.05 mm) out from de-icer edge.
Form neat, straight lines to border conductive sealer application.
NOTE: If sealer is being refurbished, ensure de-icer boot edges are free of
contamination by wiping with lint free cloth dampened with solvent.
If edge sealer is being applied as part of de-icer boot replacement, cleaning
may not be required.
(d) Mix edge sealer and accelerator thoroughly by weight or by volume using one of the
following ratios:
NOTE: Mix only amount that can be used in 4 hours.
1 Weight Ratio

30-10-40
Page 429
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

• 100.0 parts of edge sealer

• 5.6 parts of accelerator
2 Volume Ratio
• 100.0 parts of edge sealer
• 6.3 parts of accelerator
(e) Brush edge sealer between tape lines. Ensure application is even and continuous.
(f) Remove tape immediately after applying edge sealer.
(7) Allow de-icer boot to dry as follows:
CAUTION: FAILURE TO ALLOW RECOMMENDED DRY TIMES COULD RESULT IN
LIFTING OF DE-ICER AND / OR SHORTENED SERVICE LIFE.
(a) Drying time is 48 hours. If required, drying time can be reduced from 48 hours by
performing the following:
CAUTION: USE OF SHORTENED DRY TIME IS RECOMMENDED ONLY FOR
INSTALLATIONS ACCOMPLISHED BY EXPERIENCED AND SKILLED
INSTALLERS. SHORTENED DRY TIME IS NOT RECOMMENDED FOR
FIRST TIME OR RELATIVELY INEXPERIENCED INSTALLERS.
THE TEMPERATURE AT THE BOND LINE IS THE CRITICAL VALUE
FOR SHORTENED DRY TIME. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SPEED DRY
TIME BY APPLYING HEAT EXTERNALLY THROUGH THE DE-ICER
BOOT, AS THE DE-ICER BOOT WILL ABSORB THE HEAT AND
INSULATE THE BOND LINE FROM THE HEAT BEING APPLIED.
EXCESS HEAT CAN CAUSE DETERIORATION TO THE DE-ICER
BOOT.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THE DE-ICER BOOT BE INSPECTED FOR
SIGNS OF LIFTING IF INFLATED BEFORE 48 HOURS DRY TIME,
EVEN IF THE CRITERIA IN THE SHORTENED DRY TIME CHART ARE
MET.
1 Determine temperature and humidity at which de-icer boot installation will be
made and in which installation will dry.
2 Locate point on chart where temperature (top scale) and humidity (side scale)
intercept. See Figure 406.
3 If intercept point falls in INSTALLATION NOT RECOMMENDED area of chart, do
not install de-icer boot.
4 If intercept point falls in 24 HOUR DRY TIME area of chart, allow 24 hours dry
time before inflating de-icer boot.
5 If intercept point falls in CENTRAL AREA of chart, read recommended dry time
on dry time scale (bottom scale) and allow at least this dry time before inflating
de-icer boot.
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 3.B.(2)(b).

30-10-40
Page 430
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(3) After drying time, perform Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment /
Test or Code 301001.
(4) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.
4. FASTboots — Removal / Installation
A. General
This procedure applies only to the silver FASTboot® pneumatic de-icer boots. The silver
FASTboot® de-icer boots are identifiable by part number on the boots and can be identified by part
number in the illustrated parts catalog. For installation of other boot types, see Black De-icer Boots
- Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301007, Silver Estane De-icer
Boots - Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301051 or Silver Urethane
De-icer Boots - Removal / Installation, 30-10-40, Removal / Installation or Code 301061.
Silver FASTboot® pneumatic de-icer boots are installed on the leading edges of the wing and
horizontal stabilizer. Wing boots are divided into an inboard section on the fixed portion of the
leading edge and outboard section on the leading edge slats. The silver de-icer boots (Estane®,
urethane or FASTboot®) must be installed symmetrically. For example, if black de-icer boot is
replaced with silver boot on the left slat, the right slat must also be replaced with a silver boot.
The silver FASTboot® use a bonding system with Pressure Sensitive Adhesive (PSA) applied to the
de-icer bond side in manufacturing. The PSA is activated with FASTboot® primer and installation
pressure, eliminating traditional cement.
B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

Chalk line ............................................................................................................................ Standard

Circuit breaker safety clips .................................................................... GSE2400984 or equivalent
Edge sealer brush, 3 inches (76.2 mm), pure bristle ......................................................... Standard
Hook knife ........................................................................................................................... Standard
Metal roller, 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) wide x 2 inches (50.8 mm) diameter .............................. Standard
Primer applicator, brush or foam pad ................................................................................. Standard
Putty knife ........................................................................................................................... Standard
PVC tube, 3 - 4 inches (76.2 - 101.6 mm) diameter, 12 - 18 inches (304.8 - 457.2 mm) long ........
Standard
Rubber roller, 2.5 inches (63.5 mm) wide x 2 inches (50.8 mm) diameter ....................... Standard
Spray bottle ......................................................................................................................... Standard
Straight edge ....................................................................................................................... Standard
Vacuum source, 6 - 10 in. Hg. ............................................................................................ Standard
CONSUMABLES
Abrasive paper .................................................................................................................... TT-4-248
Edge filler ........................................................................................................ Proseal P/S 870B-1/2
Gap filler (aircraft structure) .............................................. PR-1422, PR-1425 (B-1/2) or PRC1750
Leading edge cleaning solvent ....................................................... Toluene TT-T-548 or equivalent
Leading edge stripper ........................................................ Methyl Ethyl Ketone or Peerco No. 321
Lint free cloth ...................................................................................................................... Standard
Masking tape, 1.0 inch (25.4 mm) ...................................................................................... Standard
Mixing cup ........................................................................................................................... Standard
Primer .............................................................................................................................. 74-451-207
Silicone grease ................................................................................... AMS-G-4343 (Molykote 55M)
Silver conductive edge sealer kit (pint) ......................................................................... 74-451-AQ1

30-10-40
Page 431
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Silver conductive edge sealer kit (quart) ....................................................................... 74-451-AQ2

Solvent (boot removal) .................................................... Toluene, Methyl Ethyl Ketone or Acetone
Stir stick .............................................................................................................................. Standard
(1) Reference(s)
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 301001
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Pull, tag and safety clip the following circuit breaker(s):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

SURFACE DE-ICE ALT Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
SURFACE DE-ICE NORM Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

C. Removal
WARNING: MANY OF THE MATERIALS SPECIFIED HAVE SIGNIFICANT OCCUPATIONAL
SAFETY, HEALTH OR ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS RELATED TO THEIR
USE. SAFETY DATA SHEETS SHALL BE CONSULTED FOR ALL MATERIALS TO
DETERMINE THE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS CONCERNING
OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE PRECAUTIONS. IT IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY
OF THE USER TO ENSURE PROTECTION FROM INJURY OR EXPOSURE, SAFE
APPLICATION OF MATERIALS AND COMPLIANCE WITH ANY FEDERAL, STATE
OR LOCAL REGULATIONS REGARDING THE USE OF ANY OF THE MATERIALS
SPECIFIED.
CAUTION: ENSURE LADDERS DO NOT RUB AGAINST DE-ICER BOOTS DURING
MAINTENANCE. DAMAGE TO DE-ICER BOOTS COULD RESULT.
DO NOT DAMAGE LEADING EDGE WHEN SCORING DE-ICER. SCORE ONLY
THROUGH TO FABRIC CARCASS TO FACILITATE REMOVAL.
(1) Cut or score along center line to separate de-icer into halves.
(2) Cut or score de-icer into 4 - 6 inches (101.6 - 152.4 mm) wide strips.
(3) Start at one end of de-icer and use boot removal solvent to lift first strip.
(4) When enough is lifted, roll strip around PVC cylinder or sturdy cylinder.
(5) Roll cylinder at 90° angle perpendicular to leading edge to pull de-icer up and off leading
edge. Maintain 90° angle to break bond at desired point.
NOTE: More solvent is normally not required.
(6) Repeat Step 4.C.(3) thru Step 4.C.(5) until all de-icer strips are removed.
(7) Remove residual adhesive on leading edge with leading edge stripper (Peerco No. 321 is
preferred).

30-10-40
Page 432
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CAUTION: REMOVE ALL STRIPPER RESIDUE BEFORE PROCEEDING OR

INADEQUATE ADHESION COULD RESULT.
(8) Clean area thoroughly with leading edge cleaning solvent.
D. Installation
WARNING: MANY OF THE MATERIALS SPECIFIED HAVE SIGNIFICANT OCCUPATIONAL
SAFETY, HEALTH OR ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS RELATED TO THEIR
USE. SAFETY DATA SHEETS SHALL BE CONSULTED FOR ALL MATERIALS TO
DETERMINE THE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS CONCERNING
OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE PRECAUTIONS. IT IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY
OF THE USER TO ENSURE PROTECTION FROM INJURY OR EXPOSURE, SAFE
APPLICATION OF MATERIALS AND COMPLIANCE WITH ANY FEDERAL, STATE
OR LOCAL REGULATIONS REGARDING THE USE OF ANY OF THE MATERIALS
SPECIFIED.
CAUTION: DO NOT HANDLE DE-ICER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. WHEN UNPACKED,
DE-ICER SHOULD BE UNROLLED WITH BOND SIDE (WITH RELEASE PAPER)
DOWN AND LAID FLAT TO KEEP PAPER FROM WRINKLING. DO NOT INFLATE
DE-ICER BEFORE INSTALLATION.
DO NOT INSTALL AT TEMPERATURE BELOW 50°F (10°C) OR IN HUMIDITY
HIGHER THAN 90%, AS PROPER ADHESION MAY NOT BE OBTAINED
REGARDLESS OF DRY TIME ALLOWED.
DUE TO THE COMPLEXITY OF THIS BOOT (MANY BENDS AND ANGLES), IT IS
EASY TO END UP WITH INSUFFICIENT MATERIAL DURING INSTALLATION.
LEAVE AS MUCH MATERIAL AS POSSIBLE ON THE BOOT DURING INITIAL
TRIMMING AND UNTIL ENTIRE BOOT IS INSTALLED. TRIM AS NEEDED DURING
FINAL TRIMMING UPON INSTALLATION.
(1) Prepare leading edges as follows:
(a) Without removing release paper, dry fit de-icer boot on leading edge. Ensure de-icer air
connection fits in air connection hole in leading edge and cutouts are properly aligned.
See Figure 401.
(b) Use de-icer boot as template to mask off installation area with 1 inch (25.4 mm)
masking tape. Allow at least 1 inch (25.4 mm) extra around edge.
(c) Mark de-icer center line on masking tape on each end of masked area.
NOTE: De-icer boot center line may not correspond with center line of aircraft leading
edge. When dry fitting de-icer boot on the inboard fixed leading edge, ensure
the lower line on back of boot lines up with edge of flap cutout on leading edge
before marking boot center line on the leading edge.
(d) Remove paint and primer within masked area with stripper (Peerco No. 321 is
preferred). De-icer boot can be installed on alodine or anodized aluminum surfaces and
on composite surfaces with primer.
(e) Abrade aluminum and composite surfaces as follows:
1 Composite surfaces are to be abraded with No. 240 aluminum oxide abrasive
paper and aluminum surfaces with fine No. 290 - 320 aluminum oxide abrasive
paper.
2 Remove sanding particles by using pressurized air or a dry lint free cloth.

30-10-40
Page 433
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(f) Wipe masked area with leading edge cleaning solvent at least twice. Wipe dry with lint
free cloth before solvent evaporates.
(g) Apply aircraft structure gap filler to skin splice gaps on leading edge as required.
(2) Install de-icer as follows:
CAUTION: DE-ICER INSTALLATION IS A CONTINUOUS PROCESS. BE PREPARED TO
INSTALL AFTER 5 MINUTE PRIMER DRY TIME. TO PREVENT AIRBORNE
CONTAMINANTS ON APPLIED PRIMER, INSTALL WITHIN 30 MINUTES
AFTER PRIMER APPLICATION.
PRIMER CAN BE USED FOR UP TO 6 HOURS AFTER OPENED. POUR
PRIMER INTO SEPARATE CONTAINER FOR USE AND SEAL ORIGINAL
CONTAINER TIGHTLY.
DO NOT INSTALL DE-ICER WITHOUT VACUUM AND RUBBER ROLLER AS
INADEQUATE ADHESION OR BUBBLES CAN RESULT.
FAILURE TO MARK CHALK LINE CAN RESULT IN MISALIGNMENT OF
DE-ICER, RESULTING IN POOR INSTALLATION. DE-ICER CAN NOT BE
REPOSITIONED AFTER CONTACT OF EXPOSED DE-ICER BOND SIDE AND
PRIMED LEADING EDGE.
(a) Snap chalk line between leading edge center line marks made in Step 4.D.(1)(c). Trace
over chalk line with ballpoint pen, then wipe leading edge to remove chalk dust.
(b) Apply primer in masked area and let dry for 5 minutes. Two coats of primer may be
applied to composite leading edges to assure primer completely covers surface. Allow
first coat to dry 5 minutes before applying second coat.
CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE RELEASE PAPER PREMATURELY, AS EXPOSED
DE-ICER BOND SIDE WILL ADHERE TO PRIMED LEADING EDGE. AS
RELEASED PAPER IS PEELED AWAY, KEEP DE-ICER FROM
CONTACTING LEADING EDGE UNTIL READY TO ROLL IN PROPER
POSITION.
(c) After primer is dry, position de-icer (without removing release paper) on leading edge
and match leading edge and de-icer center lines.
NOTE: De-icer boot has a white line on back side indicating boot center line to aid
installation.
(d) For slat de-icers only, apply silicone grease to aircraft supply line then connect de-icer
boot hose with suitable clamp.
(e) Position de-icer air connection in air connection hole on leading edge.
NOTE: For some de-icer installations, it works better to install center line and air
connection area before applying vacuum. Vacuum should be applied to
complete installation.
(f) Attach de-icer air connection with suitable clamp.
(g) Apply vacuum at nearest connection point, such in aircraft de-icing line or hose with no
valve between connection point and de-icer.

30-10-40
Page 434
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CAUTION: REMOVE BOND SIDE RELEASE PAPER ON DE-ICER CAREFULLY

WITHOUT TEARING TO AVOID PAPER SLIVERS REMAINING ON
DE-ICER BOND SIDE, WHICH CAN AFFECT ADHESION.
DO NOT TOUCH BOND SIDE AFTER RELEASE PAPER IS REMOVED
AS OILS AND CONTAMINANTS FROM HANDS CAN AFFECT
ADHESION.
ADHESIVE IS ACTIVATED BY PRESSURE. FIRMLY ROLL DE-ICER
AGAINST PRIMED LEADING EDGE WITH RUBBER ROLLER.
ALIGN DE-ICER AIR CONNECTION BEFORE PROCEEDING.
(h) Roll up de-icer with release paper outward to 12 - 18 inches (304.8 - 457.2 mm) of
inboard end.
(i) While assistant holds de-icer in place, peel back 3 - 4 inches (76.2 - 101.6 mm) of
center line release paper strip at inboard end and roll de-icer center line firmly against
leading edge center line with rubber roller, anchoring de-icer in correct position. See
Figure 403.
(j) While assistant peels center line release paper strip, roll de-icer firmly against leading
edge with rubber roller. Repeat until entire center line is installed.
(k) Bond air connection area, if de-icer has two air connections, bond both now.
NOTE: Air connections and cutouts are not the same on every de-icer. Release paper
is slit for air connections.
(l) For cutouts, install de-icer up to cutout area. Use hook knife to trim cutout to fit leading
edge.
(m) If vacuum is not applied, apply vacuum per Step 4.D.(2)(g).
(n) Beginning on air connection side center line, peel next release paper strip, taking care
exposed bond side does not touch primed leading edge.
(o) Roll firmly against leading edge while peeling release paper strip. Roll outward from
center line toward trailing edge to avoid trapping air.
(p) Continue to peel release paper strips one at a time and roll de-icer against leading
edge.
(q) Finish air connection side of de-icer by peeling final 1.50 inches (38.1 mm) release
paper edge strip and roll firmly against leading edge.
(r) Repeat Step 4.D.(2)(n) thru Step 4.D.(2)(q) for opposite side.
(3) Apply edge filler to recessed de-icer edges and cutouts as follows:
NOTE: Width between tape lines may vary depending on area to be filled. Use narrowest
width possible.
(a) Apply two lines of masking tape bordering edges or area to be filled. Apply one line to
de-icer boot surface 0.06 - 0.125 inch (1.524 - 3.175 mm) from edge. Apply second line
of masking tape on leading edge 0.25 - 0.50 inch (6.35 - 12.7 mm) from de-icer boot
edge.
(b) Mix edge filler sealer and accelerator thoroughly by volume using of the following ratio:
1 Volume Ratio

30-10-40
Page 435
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

• 17 parts of part A
• 100 parts of part B
NOTE: Do not mix more than can be used in 30 minutes.
(c) Apply edge filler using putty knife between tape lines. Use light but firm pressure with
long continuous strokes.
(d) Remove tape immediately after application of filler.
CAUTION: SILVER CONDUCTIVE EDGE SEALER SHOULD BE APPLIED AT
TEMPERATURES ABOVE 55°F (13°C).
(4) Apply silver conductive edge sealer as follows:
(a) Apply masking tape on de-icer surface around de-icer boot and cutouts at least 0.25
inch (6.35 mm) from edge. Tape should be applied at least 0.125 - 0.25 inch (3.175 -
6.35 mm) from edge filler.
(b) Apply masking tape on leading edge 0.125 - 0.25 inch (3.175 - 6.35 mm) outboard of
area initially cleaned and bonded, about 0.75 inch (19.05 mm) out from de-icer edge.
Form neat, straight lines to border conductive sealer application.
NOTE: If sealer is being refurbished, ensure de-icer boot edges are free of
contamination by wiping with lint free cloth dampened with solvent.
If edge sealer is being applied as part of de-icer boot replacement, cleaning
may not be required.
(c) Mix edge sealer and accelerator thoroughly by weight or by volume using one of the
following ratios:
NOTE: Mix only amount that can be used in 4 hours.
1 Weight Ratio
• 100.0 parts of edge sealer
• 5.6 parts of accelerator
2 Volume Ratio
• 100.0 parts of edge sealer
• 6.3 parts of accelerator
(d) Brush edge sealer between tape lines. Ensure application is even and continuous.
(e) Remove tape immediately after applying edge sealer.
(f) Allow edge sealer cure for 4 hours.
(5) Drying time
(a) If FASTboot® de-icers are installed above 50°F (10°C) and in less than 90% humidity,
they can be flown and inflated immediately after edge filler and conductive edge sealer
have cured.
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 4.B.(2)(b).
(3) After drying time, perform Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment /
Test or Code 301001.

30-10-40
Page 436
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(4) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-40
Page 437
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-10-40
Page 438
October 15/20
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DE-ICER BOOTS — SERVICING

1. De-icer Boots Surface Coating — Restore
NOTE: This procedure applies to Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 135 Post SB 200-05-280 and Aircraft 136 and
subsequent.
This procedure satisfies MRB 30-10-00-03, restore (cleaning and surface coating) all de-icing
boots.
A. Preparation
(1) Reference(s)
• Ice and Rain Protection - Servicing, 12-31-00, Servicing or Code 301010
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
B. Procedure
(1) Restore de-icer (cleaning and surface coating) boots surface coating. See Ice and Rain
Protection - Servicing, 12-31-00, Servicing or Code 301010.
C. Follow On
(1) Inspect the work area for foreign objects and damage.
(2) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-40
Page 301
September 30/22
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-10-40
Page 302
September 30/22
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

WINDSHIELD ICING DETECTION LIGHT — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. Windshield Icing Detection Light — Removal / Installation
A. General
The windshield icing detection light is located on glareshield in flight compartment.
B. Preparation
(1) References
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Windshield Icing Detection Light - Operational Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment / Test
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Select COCKPIT LIGHTS MASTER switch to OFF position.
(c) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

L INSTR OH/CONS Cockpit overhead LTS INTERIOR
R INSTR Cockpit overhead LTS INTERIOR

C. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Remove lamp shade (rubber sleeve) (1) attached on lamp cover (4).
(2) Unscrew cover (4) and remove lamp (2) from lamp housing (3).
D. Installation
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Install lamp (2) on lamp housing (3).
(2) Screw cover (4) securing lamp (2) to housing (3).
(3) Install lamp shade rubber sleeve (1) on cover (4).
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.B.(2)(c).
(3) Perform Windshield Icing Detection Light Operational Test. See Windshield Icing Detection
Light - Operational Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment / Test.
(4) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-45
Page 401
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Windshield Icing Detection Light

Figure 401

30-10-45
Page 402
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DE-ICER PRESSURE (BOOT INFLATION) SWITCH — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. De-icer Pressure Switch — Removal / Installation
A. General
Four de-icer pressure (boot inflation) switches are installed on the aircraft. One switch located in
each wing inboard of the Krueger flaps, one switch located in the forward fuselage FS 365.90 (9294
mm) and one switch located in the aft fuselage behind access door 310AB.
On Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 087 Post SB 200-30-221 and Aircraft 088 thru Aircraft 999, the left
Krueger inflation pressure switch is removed from the aircraft.
Except for access, the removal and installation procedures for all pressure switches are similar,
therefore only typical procedures are given unless otherwise noted.
B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Circuit breaker safety clips ................................................................................................. Standard
Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
CONSUMABLES
O-ring .............................................................................................................................. MS9385-04
O-ring .............................................................................................................................. MS9385-08
Safety wire ................................................................................................................... MS20995C32
(1) References
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 301001
• Krueger Flaps System - Functional Test, 27-52-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 275202
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Select DE-ICE WING & TAIL switch to OFF position.
(c) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

SURFACE DE-ICE ALT Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
SURFACE DE-ICE NORM Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

(d) For slats boot switch (213H) access, remove access panel 132HB. See Figure 401 and
Figure 402.
(e) For horizontal stabilizer switch (214H) access, open access door 310AB. See Figure
403 and Figure 404.
(f) For left or right Krueger switch (481H and 340H) access, extend Krueger flaps. See
Krueger Flaps System - Functional Test, 27-52-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 275202,
Figure 405 and Figure 406.

30-10-70
Page 401
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

C. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 407.
(1) Remove safety wire securing pressure switch (1) to T-fitting (2).
(2) Disconnect electrical connector from pressure switch (1).
(3) Remove reducer (3) with O-ring (4) from T-fitting (2). Discard O-ring (4).
(4) Remove pressure switch (1) with O-ring (5) from reducer (3).
(5) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
D. Installation
CAUTION: TO PREVENT CONTAMINATION OF SYSTEM, CHECK FOR FOREIGN OBJECTS
IN THE OPEN TUBES / PORTS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT AND EQUIPMENT.
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 407.
(1) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(2) Position O-ring (5), P/N MS9385-04, on pressure switch (1) and connect pressure switch (1)
to reducer (3).
(3) Position O-ring (4), P/N MS9385-08, on reducer (3) and install pressure switch (1), in
conjunction with reducer (3), on T-fitting (2).
(4) Connect electrical connector to pressure switch (1).
(5) Safety wire pressure switch (1) to T-fitting (2).
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.B.(2)(c).
(3) Select DE-ICE WING & TAIL switch to ON position.
(4) Perform Airfoil Functional Test. See Airfoil De-icing System - Functional Test, 30-10-00,
Adjustment / Test or Code 301001.
(5) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(6) Install access panel removed in Step 1.B.(2)(d) and / or close access door removed in Step
1.B.(2)(e).
(7) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-10-70
Page 402
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

132HB
132KR
132EB
132DB

131BL

132FB

131AL

DETAIL A

68254J00

Lower Forward Fuselage Fairing Access Panels

Figure 401

30-10-70
Page 403
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FS
365.9

SEE DETAIL A

PRESSURE
SWITCH, 213H

DETAIL A
91983J00

Slats De-icer (Boot Inflation) Pressure Switch

Figure 402

30-10-70
Page 404
February 28/10
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

310AB

311AL

DETAIL A

69768J00

Empennage Access
Figure 403

30-10-70
Page 405
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A
FS
626.0

PRESSURE
SWITCH, 214H

DETAIL A
91982J00

Horizontal Stabilizer De-icer (Boot Inflation) Pressure Switch

Figure 404

30-10-70
Page 406
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

PRESSURE
SWITCH,
481H

DETAIL A

91981J00

Left Krueger De-icer (Boot Inflation) Pressure Switch

Figure 405

30-10-70
Page 407
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

PRESSURE
SWITCH, 340H

DETAIL A

91980J00

Right Krueger De-icer (Boot Inflation) Pressure Switch

Figure 406

30-10-70
Page 408
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

91984J00

De-icer (Boot Inflation) Pressure Switch

Figure 407

30-10-70
Page 409
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-10-70
Page 410
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AIR INTAKES ANTI-ICING SYSTEM — SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. General
A. Description
The air intakes anti-icing system includes three subsystems:
• Nacelle inlet cowling anti-icing
• Engine low-pressure compressor inner stator vanes anti-ice system, which is the integral part
of the engine
• Inlet temperature / pressure probe electrical heating
The nacelle inlet cowling lip is heated by high-pressure bleed air. Air routed through Pressure
Regulating Shut-off Valve (PRSOV) to swirl nozzles duct chamber discharges through overboard
exhaust vent. The engine low-pressure compressor vanes are heated by hot air routed from the rear
compressor case through an anti-ice solenoid valve to intermediate case plenum and each stator
vane. Two inlet temperature / pressure probes are heated by 28 Vdc applied to heating coils in the
sensor stems. All parts of engine / nacelle anti-ice system are controlled simultaneously by ENGINE
ANTI ICE (L/R) pushbutton located in overhead panel. The pushbutton comes on when pressed.
2. Component Location

QTY
FIGURE 1
NOMENCLATURE PER LOCATION
SHEET
A/C
Circuit breaker - ENG ANTI- 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
ICE NACELLE L, 165H
Circuit breaker - ENG ANTI- 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
ICE NACELLE R, 158H
Circuit breaker - ENG ANTI- 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
ICE PROBE L, 159H
Circuit breaker - ENG ANTI- 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
ICE PROBE R, 160H
Pushbutton - ENGINE ANTI- 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
ICE L, 161H
Pushbutton - ENGINE ANTI- 1 1 Flight compartment overhead panel
ICE R, 162H
Relay - 64K 2 1 Flight compartment, right cockpit relay box
Relay - 63K 3 1 Flight compartment, left cockpit relay box
Relay - 66K 4 1 Right aft relay box - behind access door 162BR
Relay - 65K 4 1 Left aft relay box - behind access door 151CL
Transmitter - pressure 5 2 Engine nacelle, left and right, left side of flange
A
PRSOV 5 2 Engine nacelle, left and right, aft side of flange
A

30-20-00
Page 1
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3. Details
A. Cowling Anti-icing Equipment
Nacelle inlet cowling anti-icing equipment consist of insulated pneumatic ducts connected to engine
outboard high-pressure bleed port, a PRSOV and an air pressure transducer connected via tube
assembly to the duct. See Figure 2.
B. Air Pressure Transducer
The air pressure transducer is installed downstream from PRSOV with the bracket on the aft side of
the engine flange A and supplies electrical signal to Engine Indication and Crew Alerting System
(EICAS). The caution message ENG ANTI ICE (L/R) is provided by EICAS logic when anti-ice air
pressure is determined for certain flight conditions limits.
C. Pressure Regulating Shut-off Valve (PRSOV)
The PRSOV is normally open, electrically operated, piston modulated and pressure regulated. The
shut-off valve functions to maintain constant downstream air pressure in response to changing
supply pressure. The valve will be energized to closed position by EEC just before engine start and
whenever engine anti-icing is deselected by the pilot.
The PRSOV is clamped to and supported by engine anti-ice duct at aft side of engine flange A.
D. Controls
When ENG ANTI ICE (L/R) pushbutton is depressed, PRSOV and engine anti-ice solenoid valve is
de-energized to open. The indicating light comes on and temperature / pressure probes heat.
E. Displays
When ENG NAC ANTI ICE (L/R) control pushbutton is depressed, a message shows that air
pressure, regulated by PRSOV, is determined for certain flight conditions. When the control
pushbutton is released, while engine is running, the meaning of the message is the engine anti-ice
solenoid valve failed to close. Valve is still in the failed safe, open position.
4. Operational Summary
A. Air Intake Anti-icing System
Electrical power for the entire system is supplied through NACELLE ANTI ICE L/R and PROBE L/R
circuit breakers on the overhead panel. When the ENGINE ANTI ICE (L/R) pushbutton is
depressed, the PRSOV opens allowing nacelle inlet heating, the engine anti-ice solenoid valve
opens and low-pressure compressor vanes are heated by air routed from the rear compressor case.
The inlet air temperature / pressure probes are heated by means of heating coils. The air pressure
transducer provides the system fail indication via EICAS. The electrical circuit of the inlet air
temperature / pressure probes is completed through the oil pressure switch, preventing overheating
when the engine is off.

30-20-00
Page 2
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Component Location

Figure 1 (Sheet 1 of 5)

30-20-00
Page 3
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Component Location

Figure 1 (Sheet 2 of 5)

30-20-00
Page 4
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Component Location

Figure 1 (Sheet 3 of 5)

30-20-00
Page 5
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Component Location

Figure 1 (Sheet 4 of 5)

30-20-00
Page 6
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Component Location

Figure 1 (Sheet 5 of 5)

30-20-00
Page 7
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Air Intakes Anti-icing System

Figure 2

30-20-00
Page 8
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

162H
C
1 2
R. DIST. ENGINE 1
BUS 3 ANTI-ICE 4
2
155H 8486010 D3
L (31E/A11) 1C
D1 66K
3A C3 D2 D3
2C D1

159H
C1
C2 C3
3
B3
L 3C C1

3A B1
B2 B3
4C
2.74K
387H L.H. ENG. B1
4AC 0.5W
CONT. A2 A3
4AD
A1

X1

X2
(SURFACE DEICE)

64K
A3
A2
A1
4
X1

X2

(R.H. ENGINE INDICATION)

723FB 723F

13E R. NACELLE AND ENG

ANTI-ICE
723FC

5J L. NACELLE AND ENG

ANTI-ICE
8486010
(34E/B1)
161H
C
1 2
L. DIST. ENGINE
BUS 3 ANTI-ICE 4 5
155H D3
L D2 6
D1
3A
C3
C2
C1
159H B3
L B2
B1
3A
65K
A2 A3 D2 D3
A1 D1
C2 C3
7
C1

B2 B3
(SURFACE DEICE) 2.74K
387H L.H. ENG. B1 R.H. ENG.
0.5W
CONT. A2 A3
CONT.
A1

X1
63K X2
A3
A2
A1
8
X1

X2

(L.H. ENGINE INDICATION)

TIL-021754J

Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Electrical Schematic Diagram

Figure 3 (Sheet 1 of 2)

30-20-00
Page 9
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Electrical Schematic Diagram

Figure 3 (Sheet 2 of 2)

30-20-00
Page 10
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Control and Displays

Figure 4

30-20-00
Page 11
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-20-00
Page 12
December 15/14
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AIR INTAKES ANTI-ICING SYSTEM — ADJUSTMENT / TEST

1. Air Intakes Anti-icing System — Functional Test
A. General
This maintenance procedure provides the functional test instructions for the engine / nacelle anti-ice
system.
B. Preparation
(1) References
• External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices
• External Electrical Power - Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance
Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• EICAS Activation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices
• Engine Start, 71-00-00, Adjustment / Test
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
CAUTION: REMOVE ALL COVERS AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES FROM
AIRFRAME MOUNTED PROBES BEFORE STARTING ENGINES.
FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
(b) Ensure the following circuit breakers are depressed:

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE PROBE L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE PROBE R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

(c) Connect electrical power to aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Connection to
Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(d) Activate EICAS. See EICAS Activation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices.
C. Procedure
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE THE ENGINE ANTI-ICING SYSTEM FOR MORE THAN 30
SECONDS. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
NOTE: With both engines shutdown, start the test on the left engine anti-icing.
(1) Ensure left and right ENGINE ANTI-ICE pushbuttons are not depressed.
(a) Ensure engine ANTI-ICE pushbuttons lights are off.
(b) Ensure L and R ENG NAC ANTI-ICE messages are not displayed on EICAS.
(2) Pull L ENG ANTI-ICE circuit breaker.
(a) Ensure L ENG/NAC ANTI-ICE pushbutton light comes on.

30-20-00
Page 501
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(b) Ensure L ENG/NAC ANTI-ICE message is displayed on EICAS after 10 seconds.

(3) Depress L ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE circuit breaker.
(a) Ensure L ENGINE ANTI-ICE pushbutton light goes off.
(b) Ensure L ENG NAC ANTI-ICE message is not displayed on EICAS.
(4) Depress L ENGINE ANTI-ICE pushbutton.
(a) Ensure L ENG/NAC ANTI-ICE pushbutton light comes on.
(b) Ensure L ENG NAC ANTI-ICE message is not displayed on EICAS.
(5) Depress L ENGINE ANTI-ICE pushbutton and ensure that pushbutton light goes off.
(6) Disconnect electrical power from aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Disconnection from
Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(7) Start left engine and set thrust lever at IDLE. See Engine Start, 71-00-00, Adjustment / Test.
(8) Pull L ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE circuit breaker.
(a) Ensure L ENGINE ANTI-ICE pushbutton light comes on.
(b) Ensure engine interturbine temperature (T4.5) increased.
(c) Ensure hot exhaust air flows through air inlet openings adjacent to generator air inlet
scoop.
(d) Ensure L ENG NAC ANTI-ICE message is displayed on EICAS after 10 seconds.
(9) Depress L ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE circuit breaker.
(a) Ensure L ENGINE ANTI-ICE message is not displayed on EICAS.
(b) Ensure engine interturbine temperature (T4.5) decreased.
(c) Ensure no hot air exhausted from the air inlet opening.
(10) Depress L ENGINE ANTI-ICE pushbutton.
(a) Ensure L ENGINE ANTI-ICE pushbutton light comes on.
(b) Ensure hot exhaust air flows through air inlet opening.
(c) Ensure N1 RPM decreased.
(d) Ensure engine interturbine temperature (T4.5) is increased.
(e) Ensure L ENG NAC ANTI-ICE message is not displayed on EICAS.
NOTE: In case of low bleed pressure situation, the L ENG NAC ANTI-ICE caution
message will display on EICAS.
(11) Depress L ENGINE ANTI-ICE pushbutton
(a) Ensure L ENGINE ANTI-ICE pushbutton light goes off.
(b) Ensure no hot air is exhausted from air inlet opening.
(c) Ensure N1 RPM is increased.
(d) Ensure engine interturbine temperature (T4.5) is decreased.
(12) Position left engine thrust lever to normal take-off power setting.
(13) Depress L ENGINE ANTI-ICE pushbutton for 15 seconds.

30-20-00
Page 502
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(14) Ensure L ENG NAC ANTI-ICE message is not displayed on EICAS.

(15) Release L ENGINE ANTI-ICE pushbutton and return left engine thrust lever to IDLE.
(16) Repeat Step 1.C.(1) thru Step 1.C.(13) for right engine.
D. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Disconnect external electrical power from aircraft. See External Electrical Power -
Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(3) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-20-00
Page 503
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-20-00
Page 504
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ENGINE ANTI-ICING PRESSURE TRANSMITTER — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. Engine Anti-icing Pressure Transmitter — Removal / Installation
A. General
The engine anti-icing pressure transmitter is installed on a bracket on the aft side of engine flange
A. The removal and installation procedures for both left and right engine / nacelle anti-icing pressure
transmitters are identical.
B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Circuit breaker safety clips ................................................................................................. Standard
Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
Torque wrench, 40 - 200 inch-pounds (4.52 - 22.60 Nm) ... GSE5100721 (QC1R200) or equivalent
CONSUMABLES
Safety wire ................................................................................................................... MS20995C32
(1) References
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Functional Test, 30-20-00, Adjustment / Test or Code
302025
• Upper Engine Access Cowling - Removal / Installation, 71-10-10, Removal / Installation
or Code 711101
• Thrust Reverser System - Activation After Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance
Practices
• Thrust Reverser System - Deactivation For Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance
Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: TO PREVENT THRUST REVERSER OPERATION, THRUST
REVERSER SYSTEM MUST BE DEPRESSURIZED AND ISOLATED
PRIOR TO PERFORMING ENGINE MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE
TO THE AIRCRAFT.
(b) Ensure thrust reverser system is safe for maintenance. See Thrust Reverser System -
Deactivation For Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: TO PREVENT START OR APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER,
CIRCUIT BREAKERS MUST BE PULLED PRIOR TO PERFORMING
ENGINE MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
(c) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

30-20-05
Page 401
April 30/12
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ENG ANTI-ICE PROBE L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE PROBE R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
THRUST REVERSE L Cockpit overhead ENGINE
THRUST REVERSE R Cockpit overhead ENGINE

(d) Remove upper engine access cowling. See Upper Engine Access Cowling - Removal /
Installation, 71-10-10, Removal / Installation or Code 711101.
C. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Disconnect electrical connector (1) from pressure transmitter (2).
(2) Disconnect tube nut (3) of pressure sense tube (4).
(3) Remove jam nut (5) from pressure transmitter (2) and remove pressure transmitter (2) from
bracket (6).
(4) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
D. Installation
WARNING: TO PREVENT THRUST REVERSER OPERATION, THRUST REVERSER SYSTEM
MUST BE DEPRESSURIZED AND ISOLATED PRIOR TO PERFORMING ENGINE
MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
TO PREVENT ENGINE START OR APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER,
CIRCUIT BREAKERS MUST BE PULLED PRIOR TO PERFORMING ENGINE
MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(2) Secure pressure transmitter (2) to bracket (6) with jam nut (5).
(3) Using safety wire safety jam nut (5) to pressure transmitter (2).
(4) Connect pressure sense tube (4) to pressure transmitter (2) with tube nut (3).
(5) Torque nut (3) to 150 - 160 inch-pounds (16.95 - 18.08 Nm).
(6) Connect electrical connector (1) to pressure transmitter (2).
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Install upper engine access cowling. See Upper Engine Access Cowling - Removal /
Installation, 71-10-10, Removal / Installation or Code 711101.
(3) Restore thrust reverser system to operational condition. See Thrust Reverser System -
Activation After Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
(4) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.B.(2)(c).

30-20-05
Page 402
April 30/12
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(5) Perform Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Functional Test, 30-20-00, Adjustment / Test or Code
302025.
(6) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-20-05
Page 403
April 30/12
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Pressure Transmitter
Figure 401

30-20-05
Page 404
April 30/12
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

NACELLE PRESSURE REGULATING SHUTOFF VALVE (PRSOV) — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. Nacelle Pressure Regulating Shut-off Valve — Removal / Installation
A. General
The Pressure Regulating Shut-off Valve (PRSOV) is clamped to and supported by the engine anti-
ice ducts at the aft side of engine flange A. The removal and installation procedures for both engine
PRSOV are identical.
B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Circuit breaker safety clips .................................................................... GSE2400984 or equivalent
Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
Torque wrench, 0 - 150 inch-pounds ..................................................... GSE5101146 or equivalent
(1) References
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Functional Test, 30-20-00, Adjustment / Test or Code
302025
• Upper Engine Access Cowling - Removal / Installation, 71-10-10, Removal / Installation
or Code 711101
• Thrust Reverser System - Activation After Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance
Practices
• Thrust Reverser System - Deactivation For Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance
Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: TO PREVENT THRUST REVERSER OPERATION, THRUST
REVERSER SYSTEM MUST BE DEPRESSURIZED AND ISOLATED
PRIOR TO PERFORMING ENGINE MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE
TO THE AIRCRAFT.
(b) Ensure thrust reverser system is safe for maintenance. See Thrust Reverser System -
Deactivation For Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: TO PREVENT START OR APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER,
CIRCUIT BREAKERS MUST BE PULLED PRIOR TO PERFORMING
ENGINE MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
(c) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE PROBE L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE PROBE R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

30-20-10
Page 401
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

THRUST REVERSE L Cockpit overhead ENGINE
THRUST REVERSE R Cockpit overhead ENGINE

(d) Remove upper engine access cowling. See Upper Engine Access Cowling - Removal /
Installation, 71-10-10, Removal / Installation or Code 711101.
C. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Disconnect electrical connector (1) from shut-off valve (2).
(2) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
(3) Loosen jam nuts (3) on clamps (4) and position clamps (4) away from shut-off valve (2).
(4) Remove PRSOV (2) and remove clamps (4) from engine anti-ice ducts (5).
D. Installation
WARNING: TO PREVENT THRUST REVERSER OPERATION, THRUST REVERSER SYSTEM
MUST BE DEPRESSURIZED AND ISOLATED PRIOR TO PERFORMING ENGINE
MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
CAUTION: FAILURE TO PROPERLY INSTALL CLAMPS MAY CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
AIRCRAFT.
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Ensure thrust reverser system is safe for servicing. See Thrust Reverser System -
Deactivation For Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ENGINE START OR APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL
POWER, CIRCUIT BREAKERS MUST BE PULLED PRIOR TO
PERFORMING ENGINE MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
(2) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(3) Install clamps (4) on engine anti-ice ducts (5). Check clamps (4) are turned so jam nuts (3)
are on side of anti-ice ducts (5) nearest engine fan case.
(4) Position PRSOV (2) between engine anti-ice ducts (5). Check directional arrow on body of
shut-off valve (2) is pointed down, and circle symbol on the valve and the triangle symbol on
the ducts are aligned.
(5) Install clamps (4) on flanges of PRSOV (2) and engine anti-ice ducts (5).
NOTE: Clamps (4) must be turned so jam nuts (3) are nearest engine fan case.
(6) Tighten jam nuts (3) on clamps (4). Check jam nuts (3) are adjacent to engine fan case.
(7) Torque to 35 - 45 inch-pounds. Tap on clamp and then recheck torque. Repeat this process
until torque does not change from required 35 - 45 inch-pounds.
(8) Connect electrical connector (1) to shut-off valve (2).

30-20-10
Page 402
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Install upper engine access cowling. See Upper Engine Access Cowling - Removal /
Installation, 71-10-10, Removal / Installation or Code 711101.
(3) Restore thrust reverser system to operational condition. See Thrust Reverser System -
Activation After Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
(4) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.B.(2)(c).
(5) Perform Air Intakes Anti-Icing - Functional Test. See Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Functional
Test, 30-20-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 302025.
(6) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-20-10
Page 403
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Pressure Regulating Shut-off Valve (PRSOV)

Figure 401

30-20-10
Page 404
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

NACELLE ANTI-ICE PRESSURE SENSE TUBE — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. Nacelle Anti-ice Pressure Sense Tube - Removal / Installation
A. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Circuit breaker safety clips ................................................................................................. Standard
Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
Torque wrench, 40 - 200 inch-pounds ............................... GSE5100721 (QC1R200) or equivalent
CONSUMABLES
Compound (Fel-Pro Chemical Products L.P.) ....................................................... Anti-Galing C200
(1) References
• Lower Engine Access Cowling - Opening, 12-71-00, Maintenance Practices
• Lower Engine Access Cowling - Closing, 12-71-00, Maintenance Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Functional Test, 30-20-00, Adjustment / Test or Code
302025
• Upper Engine Access Cowling - Removal / Installation, 71-10-10, Removal / Installation
or Code 711101
• Thrust Reverser System - Activation After Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance
Practices
• Thrust Reverser System - Deactivation For Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance
Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: TO PREVENT THRUST REVERSER OPERATION, THRUST
REVERSER SYSTEM MUST BE DEPRESSURIZED AND ISOLATED
PRIOR TO PERFORMING ENGINE MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE
TO THE AIRCRAFT.
(b) Ensure thrust reverser system is safe for maintenance. See Thrust Reverser System -
Deactivation For Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: TO PREVENT START OR APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER,
CIRCUIT BREAKERS MUST BE PULLED PRIOR TO PERFORMING
ENGINE MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
(c) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE PROBE L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE PROBE R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

30-20-15
Page 401
April 30/12
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

THRUST REVERSE L Cockpit overhead ENGINE
THRUST REVERSE R Cockpit overhead ENGINE

(d) Open lower engine access cowling. See Lower Engine Access Cowling - Opening,
12-71-00, Maintenance Practices.
(e) Remove upper engine access cowling. See Upper Engine Access Cowling - Removal /
Installation, 71-10-10, Removal / Installation or Code 711101.
B. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Loosen nuts (2) at both ends of pressure sense tube (1).
(2) Remove screws (5) and (6), washers (7) and (8) and remove clamps (3) and (4) from
brackets (9) and (10).
(3) Remove pressure sense tube (1) and loosely install clamp attaching parts at their bracket
locations.
(4) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
C. Installation
WARNING: TO PREVENT THRUST REVERSER OPERATION, THRUST REVERSER SYSTEM
MUST BE DEPRESSURIZED AND ISOLATED PRIOR TO PERFORMING ENGINE
MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Ensure thrust reverser system is safe for servicing. See Thrust Reverser System -
Deactivation For Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ENGINE START OR APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL
POWER, CIRCUIT BREAKERS MUST BE PULLED PRIOR TO
PERFORMING ENGINE MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
(2) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(3) Apply anti-galling compound to threads and sealing surfaces of nuts (2) and to bearing
surfaces of screws (5) and (6).
(4) Put pressure sense tube (1) in position and secure to brackets (9) and (10) using clamps (3)
and (4), screws (5) and (6), washers (7) and (8), and nut (15). Do not tighten at this time.
(5) Torque nuts (2) to 150–160 inch-pounds.
(6) Torque screws (5) and (6) to 30 - 35 inch-pounds.
D. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Install upper engine access cowling. See Upper Engine Access Cowling - Removal /
Installation, 71-10-10, Removal / Installation or Code 711101.

30-20-15
Page 402
April 30/12
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(3) Close lower engine access cowling. See Lower Engine Access Cowling - Closing, 12-71-00,
Maintenance Practices.
(4) Restore thrust reverser system to operational condition. See Thrust Reverser System -
Activation After Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
(5) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.A.(2)(c).
(6) Perform Air Intakes Anti-Icing - Functional Test. See Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Functional
Test, 30-20-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 302025.
(7) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-20-15
Page 403
April 30/12
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Nacelle Anti-ice Pressure Sense Tube

Figure 401

30-20-15
Page 404
April 30/12
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

NACELLE ANTI-ICE PRESSURE DUCT ASSEMBLY — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. Aft Nacelle Anti-ice Pressure Duct — Removal / Installation
A. General
The nacelle anti-ice pressure duct assembly maintenance practices consists of the following
removal and installation procedures:
• Nacelle Anti-ice Aft Pressure Duct
• Nacelle Anti-ice Forward Pressure Duct
• High Pressure Bleed Duct
B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Circuit breaker safety clips ................................................................................................. Standard
Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
Torque wrench, 0 - 150 inch-pounds ........................................................................... GSE5101146
CONSUMABLES
Compound (Fel-Pro Chemical Products L.P.) ....................................................... Anti-Galing C200
Safety wire ................................................................................................................... MS20995C32
(1) References
• Lower Engine Access Cowling - Opening, 12-71-00, Maintenance Practices
• Lower Engine Access Cowling - Closing, 12-71-00, Maintenance Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Functional Test, 30-20-00, Adjustment / Test or Code
302025
• Thrust Reverser System - Deactivation, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices
• Thrust Reverser System - Activation, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: TO PREVENT THRUST REVERSER OPERATION, THRUST
REVERSER SYSTEM MUST BE DEPRESSURIZED AND ISOLATED
PRIOR TO PERFORMING ENGINE MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE
TO THE AIRCRAFT.
(b) Ensure thrust reverser system is safe for maintenance. See Thrust Reverser System -
Deactivation, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: TO PREVENT START OR APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER,
CIRCUIT BREAKERS MUST BE PULLED PRIOR TO PERFORMING
ENGINE MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
(c) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

30-20-20
Page 401
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE PROBE L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE PROBE R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
THRUST REVERSE L Cockpit overhead ENGINE
THRUST REVERSE R Cockpit overhead ENGINE

(d) Open lower engine access cowling. See Lower Engine Access Cowling - Opening,
12-71-00, Maintenance Practices.
C. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Removal clamps (2) securing nacelle anti-ice pressure duct (1) to inlet anti-ice shut-off valve
and to high-pressure bleed duct (9).
(2) Remove screws (4) and washers (5) from clamps (3) and remove aft pressure duct (1).
(3) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
(4) Remove clamps (3) from aft duct (1).
(5) Loosen secure clamps (3) to engine brackets using screws (4) and washers (5).
D. Installation
WARNING: TO PREVENT THRUST REVERSER OPERATION, THRUST REVERSER SYSTEM
MUST BE DEPRESSURIZED AND ISOLATED PRIOR TO PERFORMING ENGINE
MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
TO PREVENT ENGINE START OR APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER,
CIRCUIT BREAKERS MUST BE PULLED PRIOR TO PERFORMING ENGINE
MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Ensure thrust reverser system is safe for servicing. See Thrust Reverser System -
Deactivation, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
(2) Apply a small amount of anti-galling compound to the bearing surface of clamps (2) nuts and
screws (4).
(3) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(4) Install clamps (2) on aft pressure duct (1) and position aft pressure duct (1) in place on the
engine.
(5) Secure aft pressure duct (1) using clamps (3) screws (4) and washers (5). Do not torque
screws (4) at this time.
(6) Loosely secure aft pressure duct (1) with clamps (2). Do not torque at this time.

30-20-20
Page 402
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CAUTION: TO PREVENT MISALIGNMENT AND POSSIBLE DAMAGE DURING

INSTALLATION, DO NOT TIGHTEN CLAMPS UNTIL ALL BLEED AIR DUCT
COMPONENTS ARE PROPERLY ALIGNED.
(7) Torque tighten clamps (2) to values stamped on clamps (2) and torque tighten screws (4) to
30 - 35 inch-pounds.
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Close lower engine access cowling. See Lower Engine Access Cowling - Closing, 12-71-00,
Maintenance Practices.
(3) Restore thrust reverser system to operational condition. See Thrust Reverser System -
Activation, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
(4) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.B.(2)(c).
(5) Perform Air Intakes Anti-Icing - Functional Test. See Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Functional
Test, 30-20-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 302025.
(6) Check for air leaks from the line connectors using soap solution.
(7) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-20-20
Page 403
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Nacelle Anti-ice Pressure Duct Assembly

Figure 401

30-20-20
Page 404
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FORWARD NACELLE ANTI-ICING PRESSURE DUCT — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. Forward Nacelle Anti-ice Pressure Duct — Removal / Installation
A. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Circuit breaker safety clips ................................................................................................. Standard
Protective caps and plugs .................................................................................................. Standard
Torque wrench, 50 - 250 inch-pounds ......................................................................... GSE5100455
CONSUMABLES
Compound (Fel-Pro Chemical Products L.P.) ....................................................... Anti-Galing C200
Safety wire ................................................................................................................... MS20995C32
(1) References
• Lower Engine Access Cowling - Opening, 12-71-00, Maintenance Practices
• Lower Engine Access Cowling - Closing, 12-71-00, Maintenance Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Functional Test, 30-20-00, Adjustment / Test or Code
302025
• Thrust Reverser System - Deactivation, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices
• Thrust Reverser System - Activation, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: TO PREVENT THRUST REVERSER OPERATION, THRUST
REVERSER SYSTEM MUST BE DEPRESSURIZED AND ISOLATED
PRIOR TO PERFORMING ENGINE MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE
TO THE AIRCRAFT.
(b) Ensure thrust reverser system is safe for maintenance. See Thrust Reverser System -
Deactivation, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: TO PREVENT START OR APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER,
CIRCUIT BREAKERS MUST BE PULLED PRIOR TO PERFORMING
ENGINE MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
(c) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE PROBE L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE PROBE R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
THRUST REVERSE L Cockpit overhead ENGINE
THRUST REVERSE R Cockpit overhead ENGINE

30-20-21
Page 401
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(d) Open lower engine access cowling. See Lower Engine Access Cowling - Opening,
12-71-00, Maintenance Practices.
B. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Remove clamps (1) securing nacelle anti-ice pressure duct (3) to inlet anti-ice shut-off valve
and to the engine.
(2) Disconnect nut (2) from nacelle anti-ice pressure duct (3).
(3) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
C. Installation
WARNING: TO PREVENT THRUST REVERSER OPERATION, THRUST REVERSER SYSTEM
MUST BE DEPRESSURIZED AND ISOLATED PRIOR TO PERFORMING ENGINE
MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
TO PREVENT START OR APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER, CIRCUIT
BREAKERS MUST BE PULLED PRIOR TO PERFORMING ENGINE
MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Ensure thrust reverser system is safe for servicing. See Thrust Reverser System -
Deactivation, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
(2) Apply a small amount of anti-galling compound to the bearing surface of clamp (1) nuts and
nut (2).
(3) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(4) Install clamps (1) on forward pressure duct (3) and position forward pressure duct (3) in place
on the engine.
(5) Loosely secure forward pressure duct (3) with clamps (1). Do not torque at this time.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT MISALIGNMENT AND POSSIBLE DAMAGE DURING
INSTALLATION, DO NOT TIGHTEN CLAMPS UNTIL ALL BLEED AIR DUCT
COMPONENTS ARE PROPERLY ALIGNED.
(6) Secure nut (2) to fitting on forward pressure duct (3).
(7) Torque clamps (1) to values stamped on clamps and torque nut (8) to 150 - 200 inch-pounds.
D. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Close lower engine access cowling. See Lower Engine Access Cowling - Closing, 12-71-00,
Maintenance Practices.
(3) Restore thrust reverser system to operational condition. See Thrust Reverser System -
Activation, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
(4) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.A.(2)(c).
(5) Perform Air Intakes Anti-icing - Functional Test. See Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Functional
Test, 30-20-00, Adjustment / Test or Code 302025.

30-20-21
Page 402
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(6) Check for air leaks from the line connectors using soap solution.
(7) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-20-21
Page 403
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Forward Nacelle Anti-ice Pressure Duct

Figure 401

30-20-21
Page 404
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

HIGH PRESSURE BLEED DUCT — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. High Pressure Bleed Duct — Removal / Installation
A. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Circuit breaker safety clips .................................................................... GSE2400984 or equivalent
Torque wrench, 0 - 150 inch-pounds (0 - 16.95 Nm) ............................ GSE5101146 or equivalent
CONSUMABLES
Compound (Fel-Pro Chemical Products L.P.) ....................................................... Anti-Galing C200
Safety wire ................................................................................................................... MS20995C32
(1) Reference(s)
• Lower Engine Access Cowling - Opening, 12-71-00, Maintenance Practices
• Lower Engine Access Cowling - Closing, 12-71-00, Maintenance Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Functional Test, 30-20-00, Adjustment / Test or Code
302025
• Thrust Reverser System - Deactivation For Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance
Practices
• Thrust Reverser System - Activation After Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance
Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: TO PREVENT THRUST REVERSER OPERATION, THRUST
REVERSER SYSTEM MUST BE DEPRESSURIZED AND ISOLATED
PRIOR TO PERFORMING ENGINE MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE
TO THE AIRCRAFT.
(b) Ensure thrust reverser system is safe for maintenance. See Thrust Reverser System -
Deactivation For Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: TO PREVENT START OR APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER,
CIRCUIT BREAKERS MUST BE PULLED PRIOR TO PERFORMING
ENGINE MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
(c) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE NACELLE R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE PROBE L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
ENG ANTI-ICE PROBE R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
THRUST REVERSE L Cockpit overhead ENGINE

30-20-22
Page 401
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

THRUST REVERSE R Cockpit overhead ENGINE

(d) Open lower engine access cowling. See Lower Engine Access Cowling - Opening,
12-71-00, Maintenance Practices.
B. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Remove clamps (2) securing high pressure bleed duct (6) to aft pressure duct (1).
(2) Remove safety wire from bolts (4). Remove bolts (4) and washers (5) securing cover (3) and
high pressure bleed duct (6) to engine.
(3) Remove cover (3) and high pressure bleed duct (6).
C. Installation
WARNING: TO PREVENT THRUST REVERSER OPERATION, THRUST REVERSER SYSTEM
MUST BE DEPRESSURIZED AND ISOLATED PRIOR TO PERFORMING ENGINE
MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
TO PREVENT ENGINE START OR APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER,
CIRCUIT BREAKERS MUST BE PULLED PRIOR TO PERFORMING ENGINE
MAINTENANCE. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Ensure thrust reverser system is safe for servicing. See Thrust Reverser System -
Deactivation For Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
(2) Apply a small amount of anti-galling compound to the bearing surface of bolts (4) and clamp’s
(2) nut.
(3) Position clamp (2) on high pressure bleed duct (6) and loosely install cover (3) and high
pressure bleed duct (6) to engine with bolts (4) and washers (5). Do not torque at this time.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT MISALIGNMENT AND POSSIBLE DAMAGE DURING
INSTALLATION, DO NOT TIGHTEN CLAMPS UNTIL ALL BLEED AIR DUCT
COMPONENTS ARE PROPERLY ALIGNED.
(4) Torque tighten bolts (4) to 23 - 26 inch-pounds (2.60 - 2.94 Nm) and torque clamp (2) to
values stamped on clamp (2).
(5) Secure bolts (4) using safety wire.
D. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Close lower engine access cowling. See Lower Engine Access Cowling - Closing, 12-71-00,
Maintenance Practices.
(3) Restore thrust reverser system to operational condition. See Thrust Reverser System -
Activation After Maintenance, 78-00-00, Maintenance Practices.
(4) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.A.(2)(c).

30-20-22
Page 402
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(5) Perform Air Intakes Anti-icing System - Functional Test, 30-20-00, Adjustment / Test or Code
302025.
NOTE: Engine must be running to perform Step 1.D.(7).
(6) Open lower engine access cowling. See Lower Engine Access Cowling - Opening, 12-71-00,
Maintenance Practices.
(7) Check for air leaks from line connectors using soap solution.
(8) Close lower engine access cowling. See Lower Engine Access Cowling - Closing, 12-71-00,
Maintenance Practices.
(9) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-20-22
Page 403
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

High Pressure Bleed Duct - Removal / Installation

Figure 401

30-20-22
Page 404
August 30/16
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PROBE HEATING SYSTEM — ADJUSTMENT / TEST

1. Probes Heating System — Functional Test
A. General
This maintenance procedure provides the functional test instructions for the pitot and static,
including pitot-static, TAT and AOA probes. See Chapter 34 for the removal and installation
procedures.
B. Preparation
(1) References
• External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices
• External Electrical Power - Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance
Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• EICAS Activation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Ensure you are familiar with all Cautions and Warnings in this section before
proceeding.
(b) Pull the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

PITOT STATIC HEAT L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
PITOT STATIC HEAT R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
TAT HEAT Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
AOA PROBE HEAT L Cockpit overhead ICE PROT
AOA PROBE HEAT R Cockpit overhead ICE PROT

CAUTION: ENSURE PROTECTIVE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM PROBES

BEFORE TEST BEGINS. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT AND EQUIPMENT.
(c) Remove protective caps from pitot tubes, static ports and TAT probe.
(d) Connect external electrical power to aircraft. See External Electrical Power -
Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(e) Activate EICAS. See EICAS Activation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices.
(f) Ensure aircraft is in GND position. All tests shall be performed with aircraft on ground.
C. Procedure
WARNING: DO NOT TOUCH PROBES DURING THE TEST. DO NOT LEAVE THE PROBES
HEAT SWITCH IN THE OVRD POSITION FOR MORE THAN 1 MINUTE. FAILURE
TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE
AIRCRAFT.
(1) Pitot-static and TAT Probes Heating Test
(a) Select PROBES HEAT switch to AUTO position.

30-30-00
Page 501
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(b) Depress L and R PITOT STATIC HEAT and TAT HEAT circuit breakers.
1 Ensure R PITOT STATIC HEAT, L PITOT HEAT, TAT PROBE HEAT caution
messages are not displayed on EICAS.
(c) Momentarily select PROBES HEAT switch to OVRD position.
1 Ensure R PITOT HEAT, L PITOT HEAT and TAT PROBE HEAT messages are not
displayed on EICAS.
(d) Pull L PILOT STATIC HEAT circuit breaker and momentarily select PROBES HEAT
switch to OVRD position.
1 Ensure L PITOT HEAT and TAT HEAT caution message is displayed on EICAS.
2 Verify that static port S2 on left side of aircraft and static ports S2, S3 on right side
of aircraft are heated.
(e) Depress L PITOT STATIC HEAT circuit breaker.
(f) Pull R PITOT STATIC HEAT circuit breaker and momentarily select PROBES HEAT
switch to OVRD position.
1 Ensure R PITOT HEAT caution message is displayed on EICAS.
2 Verify that static ports S1, S3 on left side of aircraft and static ports S1 on right
side of aircraft are heated.
(g) Depress R PITOT STATIC HEAT circuit breaker.
(h) Pull TAT HEAT circuit breaker and momentarily select PROBES HEAT switch to OVRD
position.
1 Ensure TAT PROBE HEAT caution message is displayed on EICAS.
(i) Depress TAT HEAT circuit breaker.
(j) Select PROBES HEAT switch to AUTO position.
CAUTION: ENSURE PROTECTIVE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AOA PROBES
BEFORE TEST BEGINS. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE
TO THE AIRCRAFT AND EQUIPMENT.
(2) AOA Probes Heating Test
(a) Depress L and R AOA PROBE HEAT circuit breakers on overhead panel.
(b) Select HEAT PROBE switch to AUTO position.
1 Ensure L AOA HEAT FAIL and R AOA HEAT FAIL caution messages are not
displayed on EICAS.
WARNING: MANUAL MANIPULATION OF THE WOW SYSTEM IS REQUIRED TO
ACCOMPLISH THIS MAINTENANCE TASK. FAILURE TO RETURN
WOW SYSTEM TO NORMAL CONFIGURATION UPON COMPLETION
OF THIS MAINTENANCE TASK SHALL CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE
TO AIRCRAFT OR INJURY TO PERSONNEL.
(c) Simulate left and right WOW switches in air position.
(d) Pull L AOA PROBE HEAT circuit breaker.
1 Ensure L AOA HEAT FAIL caution message is displayed on EICAS.

30-30-00
Page 502
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(e) Depress L AOA PROBE HEAT circuit breaker.

1 Ensure L AOA HEAT FAlL caution message is not displayed on EICAS.
(f) Pull R AOA PROBE HEAT circuit breaker.
1 Ensure R AOA HEAT FAIL caution message is displayed on EICAS.
(g) Depress R AOA PROBE HEAT circuit breaker.
1 Ensure R AOA HEAT FAIL caution message is not displayed on EICAS.
WARNING: MANUAL MANIPULATION OF THE WOW SYSTEM IS REQUIRED TO
ACCOMPLISH THIS MAINTENANCE TASK. FAILURE TO RETURN
WOW SYSTEM TO NORMAL CONFIGURATION UPON COMPLETION
OF THIS MAINTENANCE TASK SHALL CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE
TO AIRCRAFT OR INJURY TO PERSONNEL.
(h) Return left and right WOW switches to ground position.
(i) Select HEAT PROBE switch to OVRD position.
(j) Pull L and R AOA PROBE HEAT circuit breakers.
1 Ensure L AOA HEAT FAIL and R AOA HEAT FAIL caution messages are
displayed on EICAS.
(k) Depress L and R AOA PROBE HEAT circuit breakers.
1 Ensure L AOA HEAT FAIL and R AOA HEAT FAIL caution messages are not
displayed on EICAS.
CAUTION: IF PROBE HEAT IS LEFT IN OVERRIDE POSITION, PROBES WILL
HEAT AUTOMATICALLY WHEN A GENERATOR COMES ON LINE.
DAMAGE TO AIRCRAFT MAY OCCUR.
(l) Select HEAT PROBE switch to AUTO position.
NOTE: If probe heat is left in override position, with APU running and a generator
online during main engine start, this may generate a FADEC FAULTY or
FADEC MAJOR message on EICAS.
D. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Deactivate EICAS. See Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance
Practices.
(3) Disconnect external electrical power from aircraft. See External Electrical Power -
Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(4) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
CAUTION: PRIOR TO PROTECTIVE COVER INSTALLATION ENSURE THAT PROBES
HAVE COOLED DOWN. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO
PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
(5) Install protective covers on pitot tubes, static ports, TAT and AOA probes.
(6) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-30-00
Page 503
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-30-00
Page 504
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PROBE HEATING SYSTEM — SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. General
A. Description
The left and right pitot probes, three left and three right static ports, two Angle Of Attack (AOA) probes
and the Total Air Temperature (TAT) probe are electrically heated to prevent ice formation. All heaters
are controlled by a single PROBES HEAT switch located on the overhead panel. See Figure 1.
2. Component Location

QTY
FIGURE 4
NOMENCLATURE PER LOCATION
SHEET
A/C
Circuit breaker - AOA PROBE 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
HEAT L, 743F
Circuit breaker - AOA PROBE 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
HEAT R, 744F
Circuit breaker - PITOT 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
STATIC HEAT L, 19F
Circuit breaker - PITOT 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
STATIC HEAT R, 20F
Circuit breaker - TAT HEAT, 1 1 Flight compartment overhead panel
69F
Switch - PROBES HEAT, 21F 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
Relay - 62F 2 1 Flight compartment, right cockpit relay box
Relay - 63F 2 1 Flight compartment, left cockpit relay box
Relay - 29F 2 1 Flight compartment, left cockpit relay box
Probe - total air temperature, 3 1 Fwd fuselage, right side between FS 122 (3103
181F mm) and FS 129 (3273 mm)
Probe - pilot left 22F, right, 3 2 Fwd fuselage, right and left side
23F
Transmitter - AOA left 64F, 3 2 Fwd fuselage, right and left side
right 65F
Static port - S1 left 24F, right 3 2 Fwd fuselage, right and left side, between FS
25F 239 (6070 mm) and FS 248 (6318 mm)
Static port - S2 left 51F, right 3 2 Fwd fuselage, right and left side, between FS
52F 239 (6070 mm) and FS 248 (6318 mm)
Static port - S3 left 89F, right 3 2 Fwd fuselage, right and left side, between FS
90F 239 (6070 mm) and FS 248 (6318 mm)

30-30-00
Page 1
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3. Details
A. Probes / Static Ports - Locations and Functions
The left and right heated pitot probes are mounted on the nose section and the three left and right
heated static ports are mounted on the forward fuselage sides. The left pitot probe, two left and one
right static ports heaters receive power from the Left Distribution Bus through the L PITOT STATIC
HEAT circuit breaker. Right pitot probe, two right and one left static ports heaters receive power from
the EMERG Bus through the R PILOT STATIC HEAT circuit breaker. Power is controlled by the HEAT
PROBES switch located on the overhead panel. The nose gear Weight On Wheels (WOW) switch
interrupts power to the heaters when the switch is in the AUTO position and the aircraft is on the
ground. See Figure 2.
Each heating element has a current sensor. If all heating elements fail to draw current when the
system is operating the PITOT HEAT caution message on the EICAS comes on.
The TAT probe is mounted on the right nose section. The probe heating element receives power from
the Right Distribution Bus through the TAT HEAT circuit breaker on the overhead panel. The nose
gear WOW switch interrupts power to the heater when the HEAT PROBE switch is in AUTO position
and the aircraft is on the ground.
The AOA probes are mounted on the left and right sides of the nose section. The probes have two
separate heating elements, both powered by the EMERG Bus through AOA PROBE HEAT circuit
breaker on the overhead panel. The Left and Right AOA probe case heating element incorporates a
thermostat and receives power at any time power is available at the bus. The main AOA probe
heating element receives full power in flight or when the HEAT PROBES switch is positioned to
OVRD. When the aircraft is on the ground and the HEAT PROBES switch is positioned to AUTO, the
heating element receives low power through a circuit incorporating a resistor.
B. Controls
The HEAT PROBES switch has two positions. See Figure 3.
• AUTO - Normal position, Pitot, TAT and static ports are powered in flight, WOW switch removes
electrical power on ground
• OVRD - Pitot, TAT and static ports are powered in flight and on ground
C. Displays
The Pitot and Static Heat System displays consist of the following caution messages that are
provided by EICAS. See Figure 3.
• AOA HEAT (L/R) - In flight - discontinuity in power line
• PITOT HEAT (L/R) - In flight - power supply failure
• TAT PROBE HEAT - In flight - power supply failure

30-30-00
Page 2
March 31/06
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Probes Heating System

Figure 1

30-30-00
Page 3
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Probes Heating System - Simplified Electrical Diagram

Figure 2

30-30-00
Page 4
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Probes Heating System - Controls and Displays

Figure 3

30-30-00
Page 5
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Probes Heating System - Component Location

Figure 4 (Sheet 1 of 3)

30-30-00
Page 6
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Probes Heating System - Component Location

Figure 4 (Sheet 2 of 3)

30-30-00
Page 7
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Probes Heating System - Component Location

Figure 4 (Sheet 3 of 3)

30-30-00
Page 8
March 31/06
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

WINDOWS AND WINDSHIELD HEATING SYSTEM — ADJUSTMENT / TEST

1. Windshield Heating System — Functional Test
NOTE: When the ambient and windshield temperature is above 95°F windshield heating will not be
operative. Cooling outside of windshield might be required to obtain proper testing even when
ambient temperatures are below 95°F.
A. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

Ammeter .............................................................................................................................. Standard

(1) References
• External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices
• External Electrical Power - Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance
Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• EICAS Activation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices
• EICAS Deactivation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Ensure the following Circuit Breakers (CB) are depressed:

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

HEAT CONTR L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT CONTR R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT POWER L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT POWER R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT SIDE Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD

(c) Remove flight compartment interior components as required to access flight

compartment windshield and side window terminal wires.
(d) Select HEAT W/S L and R switches to OFF position.
(e) Apply electrical power to aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft,
12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(f) Activate EICAS. See EICAS Activation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices.
B. Procedure
CAUTION: LIMIT HEATING PERIODS TO 15 SECONDS DURING TEST. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
(1) Select MASTER SWITCHES BATT to OVRRD LOAD REDUCT position.
(2) Select MASTER SWITCHES L AVIONICS to ON position.
(3) Ensure L WINDSHIELD HEAT, R WINDSHIELD HEAT and SIDE WINDOW HEAT caution

30-40-00
Page 501
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

messages are not displayed on EICAS.

(4) Position ammeter probe on left windshield ground terminal wire 1309-H38A6N, near
465GND.
(5) Select HEAT W/S L switch to HI position and verify ammeter reads 65 ±7 Amp.
(6) Pull WINDSHIELD HEAT CONTR L circuit breaker and verify the following:
(a) L WINDSHIELD HEAT message is displayed on EICAS.
(b) Ammeter current reading is zero.
(7) Depress WINDSHIELD HEAT CONTR L circuit breaker and verify the following:
(a) L WINDSHIELD HEAT message is not displayed on EICAS.
(b) Ammeter current reading is 65 ±7 Amp.
(8) Momentarily press HEAT W/S TEST switch and verify the following:
(a) L WINDSHIELD HEAT and SIDE WINDOW HEAT messages are displayed on EICAS.
(b) On Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 60 and Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 174 Pre-SB 200-30-333,
ammeter current reading is zero.
(c) On Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 174 Post SB 200-30-333 and Aircraft 175 thru 999,
ammeter current reading remains 65 ±7 Amp.
(9) Select HEAT W/S L switch to OFF position and verify ammeter current reading is zero.
(10) Select HEAT W/S L switch to LOW position and verify ammeter current reading is 46 ±5 Amp.
(11) Pull WINDSHIELD HEAT POWER L circuit breaker and verify the following:
(a) L WINDSHIELD HEAT is displayed on EICAS.
(b) Ammeter current reading is zero.
(12) Depress WINDSHIELD HEAT POWER L circuit breaker and verify ammeter current reading is
46 ±5 Amp.
(13) Select HEAT W/S L switch to OFF position and verify ammeter current reading is zero.
(14) Position ammeter probe on left side window POWER “HI” terminal wire 1301-H27B14.
(15) Select HEAT W/S L switch to HI position and verify ammeter current reading is 13 ±1.5 Amp.
(16) Select HEAT W/S L switch to LOW position and verify ammeter current reading is 13 ±1.5
Amp.
(17) Pull WINDSHIELD HEAT SIDE circuit breaker and verify the following:
(a) SIDE WINDOW HEAT message is displayed on EICAS.
(b) Ammeter current reading is zero.
(18) Depress WINDSHIELD HEAT SIDE circuit breaker and verify the following:
(a) SIDE WINDOW HEAT message is not displayed on EICAS.
(b) Ammeter current reading is 13 ±1.5 Amp.
(19) Select HEAT W/S L switch to OFF position and verify ammeter current reading is zero.
(20) Position ammeter probe on right windshield ground terminal wire 1314-H36A6N, near
472GND.

30-40-00
Page 502
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(21) Select HEAT W/S R switch to HI position and verify ammeter current reading is 65 ±7 Amp.
(22) Pull WINDSHIELD HEAT CONTR R circuit breaker and verify the following:
(a) R WINDSHIELD HEAT message is displayed on EICAS.
(b) Ammeter current reading is zero.
(23) Depress WINDSHIELD HEAT CONTR R circuit breaker and verify the following:
(a) R WINDSHIELD HEAT message is not displayed on EICAS.
(b) Ammeter current reading is 65 ±7 Amp.
(24) Momentarily press W/S HEAT TEST switch and verify the following:
(a) R WINDSHIELD HEAT message is displayed on EICAS.
(b) On Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 60 and Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 174 Pre-SB 200-30-333,
ammeter current reading is zero.
(c) On Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 174 Post SB 200-30-333 and Aircraft 175 thru 999,
ammeter current reading remains 65 ±7 Amp.
(25) Select HEAT W/S R switch to OFF position and verify ammeter current reading is zero.
(26) Select HEAT W/S R switch to LOW position and verify ammeter current reading is 46 ±5
Amps.
(27) Pull WINDSHIELD HEAT POWER R circuit breaker and verify the following:
(a) R WINDSHIELD HEAT message is displayed on EICAS.
(b) Ammeter current reading is zero.
(28) Depress WINDSHIELD HEAT POWER R circuit breaker and verify the following:
(a) R WINDSHIELD HEAT message is not displayed on EICAS.
(b) Ammeter current reading is 46 ±5 Amps.
(29) Select HEAT W/S R switch to OFF position and verify ammeter current reading is zero.
(30) Aircraft 61 thru 999, perform the following:
(a) Position ammeter probe on left side window “LO” terminal wire 1319-H72A-6.
(b) Select HEAT W/S L switch to HI position and verify ammeter current reading is zero.
(c) Select HEAT W/S L switch to LOW position and verify ammeter current reading is 22 ±3
Amp.
(d) Pull WINDSHIELD HEAT POWER L circuit breaker and verify the following:
1 L WINDSHIELD HEAT message is displayed on EICAS.
2 Ammeter current reading is zero.
(e) Depress WINDSHIELD HEAT CONTR L circuit breaker and verify the following:
1 L WINDSHIELD HEAT message is not displayed on EICAS.
2 Ammeter current reading is 22 ±3 Amp.
(f) Select HEAT W/S L switch to OFF position and verify ammeter current reading is zero.
(g) For Aircraft 61 thru Aircraft 83 Post SB 200-30-135 and Aircraft 84 thru 999, select

30-40-00
Page 503
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

BATT MASTER switch to OFF position and verify the following:

1 SIDE WINDOW HEAT message is displayed on EICAS.
2 Ammeter current reading is zero.
(h) For Aircraft 61 thru Aircraft 83 Post SB 200-30-135 and Aircraft 84 thru 999, pull GEAR
R circuit breaker and verify ammeter current reading is 22 ±3 Amp.
(i) For Aircraft 61 thru Aircraft 83 Post SB 200-30-135 and Aircraft 84 thru 999, select
MASTER SWITCHES BATT to OVRRD LOAD REDUCT position, depress GEAR R
circuit breaker and verify the following:
1 SIDE WINDOW HEAT message is not displayed on EICAS.
2 Ammeter reading is zero.
(j) Position ammeter probe on right side window power terminal wire 1320-H77A-6.
(k) Select HEAT W/S R switch to HI position and verify ammeter current reading is zero.
(l) Select HEAT W/S R switch to LOW position and verity ammeter current reading is 24
±3 Amp.
(m) Pull WINDSHIELD HEAT POWER R circuit breaker and verify the following:
1 R WINDSHIELD HEAT message is displayed on EICAS.
2 Ammeter current reading is zero.
(n) Depress WINDSHIELD HEAT POWER R circuit breaker and verify the following:
1 R WINDSHIELD HEAT message is not displayed on EICAS.
2 Ammeter current reading is 24 ±3 Amp.
(o) Pull WINDSHIELD HEAT CONTR R circuit breaker and verify the following:
1 R WINDSHIELD HEAT message is displayed on EICAS.
2 Ammeter reading is zero.
(p) Depress WINDSHIELD HEAT CONTR R circuit breaker and verify the following:
1 R WINDSHIELD HEAT and SIDE WINDOW HEAT messages are not displayed
on EICAS.
2 Ammeter current is 24 ±3 Amp.
(q) Momentarily press W/S HEAT TEST switch and verify the following:
1 R WINDSHIELD HEAT and SIDE WINDOW HEAT messages are displayed on
EICAS.
2 On Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 174 Pre-SB 200-30-333, ammeter current reading is
zero.
3 On Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 174 Post SB 200-30-333 and Aircraft 175 thru 999,
ammeter current reading remains 24 ±3 Amp.
(r) Select HEAT W/S R switch to OFF position.
(s) Remove ammeter from right side window power terminal wire 1320-H77A-6.

30-40-00
Page 504
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Deactivate EICAS. See EICAS Deactivation, 31-50-00, Maintenance Practices.
(3) Remove electrical power from aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Disconnection from
Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(4) Install interior components removed in Step 1.A.(2)(c).
(5) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-40-00
Page 505
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-40-00
Page 506
October 31/11
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

WINDOWS AND WINDSHIELD HEATING SYSTEM — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. Windshield Heat Panel Terminal Cover — Removal / Installation
A. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
DO NOT CONNECT BATTERY warning tags .................................................................... Standard
DO NOT CONNECT EXTERNAL POWER warning tags .................................................. Standard
Torque wrench, 0 - 150 inch-pounds ..................................................... GSE5101146 or equivalent
(1) References
• External Electrical Power - Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance
Practices
• Aircraft Batteries - Disconnection, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices
• Aircraft Batteries - Connection, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Ensure external electrical power is disconnected from aircraft. See External Electrical
Power - Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(c) Disconnect aircraft (main and emergency) batteries. See Aircraft Batteries -
Disconnection, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(d) Attach DO NOT CONNECT BATTERY OR EXTERNAL POWER - MAINTENANCE IN
PROGRESS warning tags to main batteries, emergency battery and external power
receptacle.
(e) Remove flight compartment ceiling trim panels.
B. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Rotate knob (1) counterclockwise and remove terminal board cover (2).
(2) Visually inspect contactors, bus bar installations and wiring.
(3) Ensure terminal boards 131TB and 132TB hardware is stacked as follows:
• Flat washer
• Lock washer
• Nut
(4) Ensure nuts are torqued to 100 - 150 inch-pounds at terminal boards 131TB and 132TB.
C. Installation
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Install cover (2) and secure with knob (1).
D. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Install flight compartment ceiling trim panels.

30-40-00
Page 401
April 30/07
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(3) Connect aircraft (main and emergency) batteries. See Aircraft Batteries - Connection,
12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(4) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-40-00
Page 402
April 30/07
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A SEE DETAIL A

SEE DETAIL B
WINDSHIELD
HEAT PANEL
ASSEMBLY
REF

DETAIL A
CONTACTOR
REF
CONTACTOR 1
REF 2

CONTACTOR
REF
DETAIL B 77886J00

Windshield Heat Panel Terminal Cover

Figure 401

30-40-00
Page 403
April 30/07
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-40-00
Page 404
April 30/07
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

WINDOWS AND WINDSHIELD HEATING SYSTEM — SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. General
A. Description
The aircraft windshield heating system prevents accumulation of ice on both windshields and the
left side window. On Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 999 Post Mod 7185, the right side window is heated
also for defogging ability. See Figure 1.
The windshield heating consists of the following major components:
• Temperature controllers
• Temperature sensors
• Control switches and a test switch
The controller receives the windshield temperature sensed by the sensor installed in the
windshields and windows. The controller drives a contactor which connects electric power to a
windshield resistor heating element according to the windshield surface temperature.
In addition each controller provides a caution signal in case of overheating and / or malfunction.
The test switch actuates a simulating circuit of the controller for an open circuit or short circuit
sensor.
2. Component Locations

QTY
FIGURE 3
NOMENCLATURE PER LOCATION
SHEET
A/C
Circuit breaker - 1 1 Cockpit overhead panel
WINDSHIELD SIDE, 452H
Circuit breaker - 1 1 Cockpit overhead panel
WINDSHIELD CONTR L, 1H
Circuit breaker - 1 1 Cockpit overhead panel
WINDSHIELD CONTR R, 2H
Circuit breaker - 1 1 Cockpit overhead panel
WINDSHIELD POWER HEAT
L, 301H
Circuit breaker - 1 1 Cockpit overhead panel
WINDSHIELD POWER HEAT
R, 302H
Left windshield, 7H 1 1 Cockpit, left windshield frame
Right windshield, 8H 1 1 Cockpit, right windshield frame
Left side window, 454H 1 1 Cockpit, left side window frame
Right side window, 456H 1 1 Cockpit, right side window frame
Push-button switch - W/S 1 1 Cockpit overhead panel
HEAT TEST, 305H
Switch - HEAT W/S L, 3H 1 1 Cockpit overhead panel

30-40-00
Page 1
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

QTY
FIGURE 3
NOMENCLATURE PER LOCATION
SHEET
A/C
Switch - HEAT W/S R, 4H 1 1 Cockpit overhead panel
Relay - 72P 2 1 Cockpit, left cockpit relay box
Relay - 451H 2 1 Cockpit, left cockpit relay box
Relay - 482H 2 1 Cockpit, left cockpit relay box
Controller - Right windshield, 2 1 Cockpit, under right side console
6H
Controller - Left windshield, 2 1 Cockpit, under left side console
5H
Controller - Left side window, 2 1 Cockpit, under left side console
453H (1)
Controller - Right side 2 1 Cockpit, under right side console
window, 455H (2)
Circuit breaker - REMOTE, 3 1 Right aft contactor box, behind access door
304H 162BR
Contactor - 14H 3 1 Right aft contactor box, behind access door
162BR (Pre-Mod 7187)
Diode - 168H 3 1 Right aft contactor box, behind access door
162BR (Pre-Mod 7187)
Contactor - 14H 2 1 Right aft upper side, behind copilot head (Post
Mod 7185)
Diode - 168H 2 1 Right aft upper side, behind copilot head (Post
Mod 7185)
Circuit breaker - REMOTE, 3 1 Left aft contactor box, behind access door
303H 151CL
Contactor - 13H 3 1 Left aft contactor box, behind access door
151CL (Pre-Mod 7187)
Diode - 169H 3 1 Left aft contactor box, behind access door
151CL (Pre-Mod 7187)
Contactor - 13H 2 1 Left aft upper side, behind pilot head (Post Mod
7185)
Diode - 169H 2 1 Left aft upper side, behind pilot head (Post Mod
7185)
Contactor - 461H 2 1 Left aft upper side, behind pilot head
Contactor - 462H 2 1 Right aft upper side, behind copilot head

30-40-00
Page 2
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(1)
On Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 060 and Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 174 Pre-SB 200-30-333
(2)
On Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 174 Pre-SB 200-30-333

3. Details
A. Cockpit Side Windows
The side windshields do not accumulate ice. It is possible to look through these areas if the front
windshields accumulate ice and forward visibility is lost. For Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 999, the pilot
and copilot side windows are heated to prevent residual ice accumulation as a result of front
windshield anti-ice operation. For Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 060, only the pilot side window is heated.
See Wiring Diagram Manual.
The pilot and copilot windshields and side windows are made of multiple layer transparencies.
Electrical heating elements are embedded between layers of each windshield and side window. The
pilot side is powered from the left main bus and its temperature controller by the left distribution bus.
The copilot side is powered from the right main bus. Heating elements are protected by
WINDSHIELD POWER HEAT L and R circuit breakers on the overhead panel. Temperature control
units are protected by the WINDSHIELD CONTR L and R circuit breakers.
Each side has a temperature sensor embedded in the windshield, connected to a temperature
controller behind the instrument panel and HEAT W/S L and R switches on the overhead panel. A
lighted pushbutton, SYSTEM/WARN TEST W/S HEAT, on the overhead panel, is used to test and
indicate system failures by displaying windshield heat message on EICAS.
B. Windshield Heat Switches
The pilot and copilot windshield contain three zones of electrical heating for deicing, low power zone
A, high power zone B and low power zone C. The WINDSHIELD HEAT LH, RH and HI/LOW
switches control input power and direction to the three heating zones. Electrically, zone A and zone
B are in series and both A and B are in parallel with zone C. In low mode all three zones are heated.
Only high power zone B is heated when the HI/LOW switch is selected. Refer to Wiring Diagram
Manual.
For Aircraft 074 thru Aircraft 083 Post Mod G2-10022 side windows are heated on ground and
during flight permanently with MASTER SWITCHES BATT switch at ON.
For Aircraft 084 thru Aircraft 999 Post Mod G2-20054 side windows are heated on ground if
MASTER SWITCHES BATT switch at ON and HEAT W/S L and R switches (3H and 4H) at LOW or
HI position.
Positioning the HEAT W/S L or R switch to on powers the temperature control unit. The unit receives
windshield temperature data from the temperature data sensor and if the temperature is below the
required range of 90°F - 110°F (32°C - 43°C), the temperature control unit activates a relay which
directs power to the heating element. The temperature control unit continuously monitors the
windshield temperature and cycles the power on and off as necessary to maintain the required
temperature range. If the power supply to the system or the temperature control unit fails, CAS
caution messages and indicator light in the W/S HEAT TEST pushbutton come on. The lights also
come on to indicate correct system operation when the HEAT W/S L and R switch is positioned to
HI or LOW and the W/S HEAT TEST pushbutton is pressed.
C. Controls
The HEAT W/S L and R switches have the following three positions (see Figure 2):
• HI - High current is supplied to all three zones heating elements for use during ice
accumulation
• LOW - Low current is supplied to all three zones heating elements for normal use

30-40-00
Page 3
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

• OFF - Windshield heat is off

W/S HEAT TEST - A push-button switch on the overhead panel, tests the windshield heating
system. If the test is successful, the WINDSHIELD HEAT (L/R) and SIDE WINDOW HEAT are
displayed on the EICAS.
D. Displays
The windshield heating system displays contains the following caution messages (see Figure 2):
• L WINDSHIELD HEAT - Left windshield heating system malfunctions
• R WINDSHIELD HEAT - Right windshield heating system malfunctions
• SIDE WINDOW HEAT - Left side window heat malfunction

30-40-00
Page 4
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TEMPERATURE
SENSORS

ZONE
ZONE B C

ZONE A
SEE DETAIL A
SEE
DETAIL B
ANTI-STATIC
GROUND TAB
DETAIL A
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT WINDSHIELD
LEFT WINDOW SHOWN
RIGHT WINDOW OPPOSITE
AIRCRAFT 004 THRU 006

ANTI-STATIC
GROUND TAB

GROUND
TERMINAL
2
1
ZONE C 3
4
8
ZONE B 7
SENSING ELEMENTS 5
6
ZONE A

DETAIL B
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC 92271J00

Windows and Windshield Heating System

Figure 1 (Sheet 1 of 5)

30-40-00
Page 5
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TEMPERATURE
SENSORS

ZONE A
ZONE
C

ZONE B

SEE DETAIL A

SEE DETAIL B
DETAIL A
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT WINDSHIELD
LEFT WINDOW SHOWN
RIGHT WINDOW OPPOSITE
AIRCRAFT 007 THRU 999

ANTI-STATIC
GROUND TAB

GROUND
TERMINAL
2
1
ZONE C 3
4
SENSING ELEMENTS 8
ZONE B 7
5
6
ZONE A

DETAIL B
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC 92272J00

Windows and Windshield Heating System

Figure 1 (Sheet 2 of 5)

30-40-00
Page 6
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TEMPERATURE
SENSORS

SEE
DETAIL B

HI/LO
HEATED
AREA
SEE DETAIL A

ANTI-STATIC
DETAIL A GROUND TAB
LEFT SIDE WINDOW
AIRCRAFT 004 THRU 060

ANTI-STATIC
GROUND TAB

GROUND
TERMINAL

3
4

SENSING 8
ELEMENTS 7

DETAIL B
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC 92273J00

Windows and Windshield Heating System

Figure 1 (Sheet 3 of 5)

30-40-00
Page 7
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

TEMPERATURE
SENSORS

SEE
DETAIL B

LO
HEATED
AREA

HI/LO
SEE DETAIL A HEATED
AREA

DETAIL A ANTI-STATIC
GROUND TAB
LEFT SIDE WINDOW
AIRCRAFT 061 THRU 999

GND

S1
SENSING S2
ELEMENTS
S3
S4
S5
S6
LO
HI

DETAIL B
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
92274J00

Windows and Windshield Heating System

Figure 1 (Sheet 4 of 5)

30-40-00
Page 8
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A TEMPERATURE

SENSORS

LO HEATED
AREA

SEE DETAIL A

ANTI-STATIC DETAIL A
GROUND TAB RIGHT SIDE WINDOW
AIRCRAFT 061 THRU 999

GND

TEMPERATURE
S1 SENSORS
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6

ANTI-STATIC
GROUND TAB
DETAIL B
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
92275J00

Windows and Windshield Heating System

Figure 1 (Sheet 5 of 5)

30-40-00
Page 9
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A
SEE
DETAIL B STICK
SEE DETAIL C
PUSHER

SIDE

452H R

CONTR

L R

POWER
2H
1H
L R
HEAT
WIPERS 302H
301H L R

WINDSHIELD

DETAIL A

3H 4H
305H

DE ICE HEAT
WINDSHIELD BAGGAGE
WING & TAIL L R PROBES COMPRT
SYSTEM/WARN TEST
ALT HI HI OVRRD TEST
IND TEST VMO MMO SYS HEAT DEICE ENG VIB
DCU A ADC 1
OFF OFF OFF OFF & LITS TEST TEST TEST
OFF OFF

NORM LO LO AUTO ON
TEST TEST
DCU B ADC 2

GYRO STALL

APU
EMERGENCY
APU FIRE GEN MASTER STARTER LTS
BATT BUS
RESET OFF STOP
OFF OVRD L OFF
APU ARM PRESS
TO OFF DOOR OFF
FIRE EMPTY TEST CLOSE ON AUTO ARM

ON ON START OVRD OVRD R ON

DETAIL B

DETAIL C
92270J00

Windows and Windshield Heating System - Controls and Displays

Figure 2

30-40-00
Page 10
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL D

SEE DETAIL C RIGHT SIDE

WINDOW
SEE DETAIL B CONTROLLER
455H
SEE DETAIL A
RIGHT
WINDSHIELD
CONTROLLER
RELAY 6H
RELAY
466H 467H
DETAIL A

RIGHT COCKPIT
RELAY BOX LEFT SIDE
WINDOW
CONTROLLER
453H
LEFT
WINDSHIELD
DETAIL D CONTROLLER
RELAY 5H
72P

LEFT COCKPIT
RELAY BOX

RELAY
451H

RELAY
173H
DETAIL B
RELAY
482H

DETAIL C 92291J00

Windows and Windshield Heating System - Component Location

Figure 3 (Sheet 1 of 2)

30-40-00
Page 11
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE
DETAIL A
SEE
DETAIL B SEE
DETAIL C
UP

RIGHT AFT
REMOTE CONTACTOR BOX
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
303H CONTACTOR DETAIL A
13H

UP
DIODE
169H

DETAIL D

REMOTE CIRCUIT
BREAKER SEE
304H DETAIL D
LEFT AFT
CONTACTOR CONTACTOR BOX
14H

DETAIL B

DIODE
168H

DETAIL C 92292J00

Windows and Windshield Heating System - Component Location

Figure 3 (Sheet 2 of 2)

30-40-00
Page 12
October 31/13
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

WINDSHIELD AND LEFT SIDE WINDOW TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS — REMOVAL /

INSTALLATION
1. Windshield and Side Window Temperature Controllers — Removal / Installation
A. General
The windshield heat control units are located in the left and right side consoles in cockpit. Aircraft
004 thru Aircraft 060 have three total controllers, two controllers on the left side console and one
controller on the right side console. Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 174 Pre-SB 200-30-333 have two
control units in each side console. Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 174 Post SB 200-30-333 and Aircraft 175
thru Aircraft 999 have one control unit in each side console.
B. Preparation
(1) References
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Windshield Heating System - Functional Test, 30-40-00, Adjustment / Test or Code
304001
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(b) Select W/S HEAT L and R switches to OFF position.
WARNING: BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE ON WINDSHIELD WIPER
SYSTEM, PULL WINDOW HEAT POWER L / R, CONTR L / R AND
SIDECUIT BREAKERS ON OVERHEAD PANEL.
IF CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE NOT PULLED DURING MAINTENANCE,
PERSONNEL MAY RECEIVE AN ELECTRICAL SHOCK WHEN
WINDSHIELD IS TOUCHED.
(c) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

HEAT SIDE Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT POWER L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT POWER R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT CONTR L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT CONTR R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD

(d) Remove the following access panels (see Figure 401 and Figure 402):

221BZ 221CZ 223BZ 223CZ

C. Removal
NOTE: The following procedures are provided for removing windshield heat control unit.
• 1.C1. provides procedure for removing windshield heat control unit on Aircraft 004
thru Aircraft 060 and Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 174 Pre-SB 200-30-333

30-40-05
Page 401
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

• 1.C2. provides procedure for removing windshield heat control unit on Aircraft 061
thru Aircraft 174 Post SB 200-30-333 and Aircraft 175 thru Aircraft 999
C1. Removal of Windshield Heat Control Unit on Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 060 and Aircraft 061
thru Aircraft 174 Pre-SB 200-30-333
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 403.
(1) Disconnect electrical connector (1) from heat control unit (2).
(2) Remove bolts (3), washers (4) and bonding strap (5) securing heat control unit (2).
NOTE: For control units in pilot side console, remove clamps with hardware.
(3) Remove heat control unit (2) from aircraft.
(4) Install protective caps and plugs on all open electrical connections.
C2. Removal of Windshield Heat Control Unit on Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 174 Post SB 200-30-333
and Aircraft 175 thru Aircraft 999
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 404.
(1) Disconnect electrical connector (1) from heat control unit (2).
(2) Remove bolts (3) and washers (4) securing heat control unit (2).
NOTE: For control unit in pilot side console, remove clamps with hardware.
(3) Remove heat control unit (2) from aircraft.
(4) Install protective caps and plugs on all open electrical connections.
D. Installation
NOTE: The following procedures are provided for installing windshield heat control unit.
• 1.D1. provides procedure for installing windshield heat control unit on Aircraft 004
thru Aircraft 060 and Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 174 Pre-SB 200-30-333
• 1.D2. provides procedure for installing windshield heat control unit on Aircraft 061
thru Aircraft 174 Post SB 200-30-333 and Aircraft 175 thru Aircraft 999
D1. Installation of Windshield Heat Control Unit on Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 060 and Aircraft 061
thru Aircraft 174 Pre-SB 200-30-333
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 403.
(1) Remove protective caps and plugs from all electrical connections.
(2) Position heat control unit (2) in side console.
(3) Install bonding strap (5), washers (4) and bolts (3).
NOTE: For control units in pilot side console, install clamps with hardware.
(4) Connect electrical connector (1) to heat control unit (2). Safety wire electrical connector.
D2. Installation of Windshield Heat Control Unit on Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 174 Post SB 200-30-
333 and Aircraft 175 thru Aircraft 999
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 404.
(1) Remove protective caps and plugs from all electrical connections.
(2) Position heat control unit (2) in side console.

30-40-05
Page 402
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(3) Install washers (4) and bolts (3).

NOTE: For control unit in pilot side console, install clamps with hardware.
(4) Connect electrical connector (1) to heat control unit (2). Safety wire electrical connector.
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.B.(2)(c).
(3) Select W/S HEAT L and R switches to ON position.
(4) Perform Windshield Heating System - Functional Test, 30-40-00, Adjustment / Test or Code
304001.
(5) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(6) Install access panels removed in Step 1.B.(2)(d).
(7) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-40-05
Page 403
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

221AZ

221BZ

221CZ

DETAIL A 68256J00

Left Side Console Access Panels

Figure 401

30-40-05
Page 404
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

223AZ

223BZ

223CZ

DETAIL A 68257J00

Right Side Console Access Panels

Figure 402

30-40-05
Page 405
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL B

SEE DETAIL A

SEE DETAIL C

DETAIL A DETAIL B
4
5 3

2
1

DETAIL C
87265J00

Temperature Controllers ( Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 060 and Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 174 Pre-SB 200-30-333)
Figure 403

30-40-05
Page 406
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL B

SEE DETAIL A

SEE DETAIL C

DETAIL A DETAIL B

4
3
1

DETAIL C 87266J00

Temperature Controllers ( Aircraft 061 thru Aircraft 174 Post SB 200-30-333) and Aircraft 175 thru Aircraft 999
Figure 404

30-40-05
Page 407
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-40-05
Page 408
February 28/10
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

WINDSHIELD WIPER SYSTEM — SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. General
A. Description
The windshield wiper system is installed on Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 160 Pre-SB 200-30-331. The
system is designed to remove rain water encountered during taxiing, taking off, landing and approach
at a speed up to 200 Knot Calibrated Airspeed (KCAS). See Figure 1.
2. Component Location

QTY
FIGURE 3
NOMENCLATURE PER LOCATION
SHEET
A/C
Circuit breaker - WIPER L, 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
1M
Circuit breaker - WIPER R, 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
2M
Selector switch - 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
WINDSHIELD WIPER L, 3M
Selector switch - 1 1 Flight compartment, overhead panel
WINDSHIELD WIPER R, 4M
Relay - 39M 2 1 Flight compartment, left cockpit relay box
Relay - 5M 2 1 Flight compartment, left cockpit relay box
Relay - 40M 2 1 Flight compartment, right cockpit relay box
Relay - 6M 2 1 Flight compartment, right cockpit relay box
Motor - left wiper, 7M 3 1 Windshield frame, left
Motor - right wiper, 8M 3 1 Windshield frame, right

3. Details
A. Pilot and Copilot Systems
The pilot and copilot systems are symmetrical and completely independent from each another. Each
system comprises of an electrical motor (two speeds) fitted to a mechanical converter which drives
the wiper arm and wiper blade. See Figure 2.
An electromechanical device automatically parks the wiper arm blade when OFF/PARK is selected.
This position moves the blade off the windshield under the wiper fairing structure against a pad. The
wiper arm blade assembly is designed to be lifted into park position by moving the cam follower fitted
on arm over a ramp in order to avoid dust and sand deposits which could cause scratches on the
windshield glass during the wiper operation. The motor converter is provided with three operation
modes:
• OFF/PARK
• SLOW SPEED
• FAST SPEED

30-41-00
Page 1
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4. Operational Summary
A. Windshield Wipers
Each wiper is controlled by a separate WINDSHIELD WIPERS knob located on the overhead panel.
L and R distribution buses supply 28 Vdc power through L and R WINDSHIELD WIPER circuit
breakers on the overhead panel.
Each control has the following positions:
• L and R WINDSHIELD WIPERS knob - Located on overhead panel, they independently control
operation of the left and right windshield wipers
• OFF/PARK - Switches off wiper and returns wiper to stowed position
• SLOW - Slow wiper speed
• FAST - Fast wiper speed

30-41-00
Page 2
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Windshield Wiper System - Simplified Schematic Diagram

Figure 1

30-41-00
Page 3
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Windshield Wiper System - Electrical Schematic Diagram

Figure 2

30-41-00
Page 4
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Windshield Wiper System - Component Location

Figure 3 (Sheet 1 of 3)

30-41-00
Page 5
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Windshield Wiper System - Component Location

Figure 3 (Sheet 2 of 3)

30-41-00
Page 6
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Windshield Wiper System - Component Location

Figure 3 (Sheet 3 of 3)

30-41-00
Page 7
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-41-00
Page 8
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

WINDSHIELD WIPER SYSTEM — ADJUSTMENT / TEST

1. Windshield Wipers System — Functional Test / Adjustment
NOTE: This procedure applies to Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 160 Pre-SB 200-30-331.
A. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

Circuit breaker safety clips ................................................................................................. Standard

Push-pull tension gage, 0 - 10 pounds ................................... GSE5100761 (719-10) or equivalent
Rigging pin, 1/8 inch ........................................................................................................... Standard
CONSUMABLES
Masking tape ....................................................................................................................... Standard
Washers ................................................................................................................ NAS1149G0316P
Water ................................................................................................................................... Standard
(1) References
• External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Windshield Wiper Motor Converter - Removal / Installation, 30-41-10, Removal /
Installation or Code 304002
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE ON WINDSHIELD WIPER
SYSTEM, PULL WINDSHIELD HEAT POWER L / R, CONTR L / R AND
SIDE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ON OVERHEAD PANEL. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND / OR
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
(b) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following circuit breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

HEAT CONTR L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT CONTR R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT POWER L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT POWER R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT SIDE Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD

(c) Select WINDSHIELD WIPER L and R selector switches to OFF position.

(d) Connect external electrical power to aircraft. See External Electrical Power -
Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.

30-41-00
Page 501
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

B. Procedure
CAUTION: DURING WIPER OPERATION THE WINDSHIELDS MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY
SPRAYED WITH WATER. OPERATION ON DRY WINDSHIELDS CAN CAUSE
MOTOR OVERLOADING AND SCRATCHES ON WINDSHIELD GLASS.
(1) Functional Test
NOTE: The sweeping rate is 120 ±18 strokes per minute in slow speed mode and 180 ±27
strokes per minute in fast speed mode.
During wiper operation, ensure windshield is sprayed continuously with water.
(a) Ensure WIPERS L and R circuit breakers on overhead panel are depressed.
(b) Using WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R selector switch, operate wiper arms for several
cycles in fast and slow speed modes then position selector switch to OFF/PARK
position.
1 Verify sweeping area is within limits shown in Figure 501.
2 Verify wiper arms are resting properly in park position.
(c) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to SLOW and operate wipers to
highest point of sweep and pull WIPER L and R circuit breakers.
(d) Using push-pull tension gage, check blade pressure at highest point of windshield.
1 Verify measured force does not exceed 7 pounds. See Figure 502.
(e) Depress WIPER L and R circuit breakers.
(f) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to SLOW and operate wipers to
outboard point of sweep and pull L and R WIPER circuit breakers.
(g) Using push-pull tension gauge, check blade pressure at maximum outboard position.
1 Verify measured force is 5.6 ±0.4 pounds.
NOTE: If blade pressure is not within tolerance, adjust blade pressure.
(h) Check for any interference between wiper arms and structure, including windshield
glass.
(i) Verify blades are not floating and rest properly on ramps.
(j) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to OFF/PARK.
(2) Wiper Blade Arm Position Check
WARNING: BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE ON WINDSHIELD WIPER
SYSTEM, PULL WINDSHIELD HEAT POWER L / R, CONTR L / R AND SIDE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS ON OVERHEAD PANEL. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY
RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND / OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION: DURING WIPER OPERATION THE WINDSHIELDS MUST CONTINUOUSLY
BE SPRAYED WITH WATER. OPERATION ON DRY WINDSHIELDS CAN
CAUSE MOTOR OVERLOADING AND SCRATCHES ON WINDSHIELD
GLASS.
NOTE: During wiper operation, ensure windshield is sprayed continuously with water.
(a) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to SLOW position. After several
cycles, select switch to OFF/PARK position.

30-41-00
Page 502
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(b) Pull WIPERS L and R circuit breakers.

(c) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switch to SLOW position.
(d) Depress WIPERS L and R circuit breakers and operate system several cycles.
(e) Stop operation by pulling circuit breaker when wiper arm is at outboard limit of
sweeping area. See Figure 501.
1 Verify blade tip is not touching rubber seal at outboard limit of sweeping area.
(f) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switch to OFF/PARK.
1 Verify blade parks properly beyond the window sill.
(g) Pull blade arm assembly towards window sill so as to conceal freeplay.
1 Verify 0.39 - 0.79 inch (10 - 20mm) clearance from window sill. If not, measure
angular offset required to accomplish minimum clearance. See Figure 503.
(h) Insert 1/8 inch rig pin through wiper arm in order to nullify spring-load on blade arm.
See Figure 502.
(i) Rotate blade arm to proper park position. See Figure 501.
(j) For fine adjustment, change position of serrated bushing relative to blade arm.
(k) Install blade arm on motor converter shaft using bolt.
(l) Remove rig pin.
NOTE: The rig pin must be inserted when removing arm from motor converter shaft.
(3) Wiper Blade Pressure Adjustment
CAUTION: DURING WIPER OPERATION THE WINDSHIELDS MUST CONTINUOUSLY
BE SPRAYED WITH WATER. OPERATION ON DRY WINDSHIELDS CAN
CAUSE MOTOR OVERLOADING AND SCRATCHES ON WINDSHIELD
GLASS.
NOTE: During wiper operation, ensure windshield is sprayed continuously with water.
Do not stop operation of wiper by selecting switch to OFF/PARK position. Use
WIPERS L and R circuit breakers to start and stop operation except where
otherwise noted.
(a) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to SLOW position and operate wiper
to midstroke position and pull WIPERS L and R circuit breakers.
(b) Attach hook to center of blade and measure force required to start lifting of blade from
windshield. Force shall be 6.5 ±0.4 pounds. See Figure 502.
(c) If force requires adjustment, rotate bolt on wiper arm clockwise to increase spring-load
or counterclockwise to decrease spring-load.
(4) Wiper Blade Arm Position - Final Adjustment
CAUTION: DURING WIPER OPERATION THE WINDSHIELDS MUST CONTINUOUSLY
BE SPRAYED WITH WATER. OPERATION ON DRY WINDSHIELDS CAN
CAUSE MOTOR OVERLOADING AND SCRATCHES ON WINDSHIELD
GLASS.
NOTE: During wiper operation, ensure windshield is sprayed continuously with water.

30-41-00
Page 503
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(a) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to FAST and operate wipers through
several cycles.
NOTE: Wiper blade shall reach position on each cycle and tip shall not touch rubber
seal at both inboard and outboard end of wiping stroke.
(b) Note amount of required blade arm relocation at far end of blade.
(c) Pull WIPERS L and R circuit breakers.
(d) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to SLOW and operate wipers to
outboard limit of sweeping area and pull WIPERS L and R.
CAUTION: DO NOT MARK DIRECTLY ON WINDSHIELD. APPLY MASKING TAPE
TO WINDSHIELD AND MAKE REFERENCE MARKS ON TAPE.
FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE WINDSHIELD.
(e) Apply masking tape to windshield and mark with approximate position of far end of
blade. Mark required offset.
(f) Lift blade from windshield using rig pin.
(g) Remove bolt securing wiper arm to motor converter.
(h) Remove wiper arm from motor converter.
(i) Change position of serrated bushing relative to housing in wiper arm.
(j) Install wiper arm on shaft to bring blade to offset mark on masking tape and install bolt.
See Figure 502.
(k) Repeat Step 1.B.(4)(a).
(l) If necessary, repeat Step 1.B.(4)(b) thru Step 1.B.(4)(j).
(m) After final adjustment, select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to OFF/PARK
position.
(n) Wiper blade shall rest on ramp as shown in Figure 503.
(o) Ensure clearance is at least 0.39 inch from window sill.
(p) Operate system several times in both speed modes and parking. Check for sufficient
clearance of deflector to windshield frame and to windshield frame and wiper arm to
fairing.
(5) Wiper Blade Pressure - Final Adjustment
CAUTION: DURING WIPER OPERATION THE WINDSHIELDS MUST CONTINUOUSLY
BE SPRAYED WITH WATER. OPERATION ON DRY WINDSHIELDS CAN
CAUSE MOTOR OVERLOADING AND SCRATCHES ON WINDSHIELD
GLASS.
NOTE: During wiper operation, ensure windshield is sprayed continuously with water.
This step applies to Aircraft having wiper arm Part No. 4AS7530220-003 or
4AS7530220-004.
(a) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to SLOW and operate wipers to
position blade at maximum inboard position (bottom of operating sweep) and pull
WIPERS L and R circuit breakers.
(b) Measure blade pressure. See Step 1.B.(3). Measured force shall be 5.6 ±0.4 pounds.

30-41-00
Page 504
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(c) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to SLOW and operate wipers to
position blade at highest point of windshield and pull WIPERS L and R circuit breakers.
(d) Measure blade pressure. See Step 1.B.(3). Measured force shall not exceed 7.00
pounds.
(e) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to SLOW and operate wipers to
position blade at maximum outboard position and pull WIPERS L and R circuit
breakers.
(f) Measure blade pressure. See Step 1.B.(3). Measured force shall be 5.6 ±0.4 pounds.
NOTE: If required blade pressure is not achieved, reposition motor converter shaft.
See Step 1.B.(7).
(g) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to OFF/PARK.
(h) Measure blade pressure. See Step 1.B.(3). Measured force shall be greater than 5.8
pounds.
(6) Wiper Blade Pressure - Final Adjustment
CAUTION: DURING WIPER OPERATION THE WINDSHIELDS MUST CONTINUOUSLY
BE SPRAYED WITH WATER. OPERATION ON DRY WINDSHIELDS CAN
CAUSE MOTOR OVERLOADING AND SCRATCHES ON WINDSHIELD
GLASS.
NOTE: During wiper operation, ensure windshield is sprayed continuously with water.
This step applies to Aircraft having wiper arm Part No. 4AS7530220-005 or
4AS7530220-006.
(a) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to SLOW and operate wipers to
position blade at maximum inboard position (bottom of operating sweep) and pull
WIPERS L and R circuit breakers.
(b) Measure blade pressure. See Step 1.B.(3). Measured force shall be 4.5 +0.9 pounds.
(c) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to SLOW and operate wipers to
position blade at highest point of windshield and pull WIPERS L and R circuit breakers.
(d) Measure blade pressure. See Step 1.B.(3). Measured force shall be within 6.1 - 7.0
pounds.
(e) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to SLOW and operate wipers to
position blade at maximum outboard position and pull WIPERS L and R circuit
breakers.
(f) Measure blade pressure. See Step 1.B.(3). Measured force shall be 4.5 +1.0 pounds.
NOTE: If required blade pressure is not achieved, reposition motor converter shaft.
See Step 1.B.(7).
(g) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to OFF/PARK.
(h) Measure blade pressure. See Step 1.B.(3). Measured force shall be greater than 5.8
but no more than 7.5 pounds.
(7) Windshield Wiper Motor Converter Shaft - Relocation

30-41-00
Page 505
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(a) Remove motor converter and insert a spacer 0.078 ±0.007 inch thick between motor-
converter base and motor converter supporting bracket. See Windshield Wiper Motor
Converter - Removal / Installation, 30-41-10, Removal / Installation or Code 304002.
(b) Use washers, Part No. NAS1149G0316P, 0.015 inch temporarily. See Figure 502.
(c) Check blade pressure. See Step 1.B.(5). If within limits, bond temporary spacers (made
of standard washers) to support.
(d) If measured blade pressure exceeds required values, decrease spacer thickness to
change angle of motor-converter shaft in required direction.
1 For example, to increase blade pressure at inboard position, decrease one
spacer thickness at attaching bolt which is in line with wiper arm. At same time
decrease half of spacer thickness from two adjacent bolts. In any case, difference
between thickness of spacers at each bolt on opposite sides shall not exceed
0.09 inch (2.5 mm). See Figure 502.
(e) After required blade pressure is achieved, bond this spacer to motor converter support
so as to position motor converter as defined per Step 1.B.(7)(c).
(f) Install motor converter. See Windshield Wiper Motor Converter - Removal / Installation,
30-41-10, Removal / Installation or Code 304002.
C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-41-00
Page 506
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Windshield Wipers - Sweeping Area

Figure 501 (Sheet 1 of 2)

30-41-00
Page 507
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Windshield Wipers - Sweeping Area

Figure 501 (Sheet 2 of 2)

30-41-00
Page 508
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Adjustment of Blade Pressure

Figure 502

30-41-00
Page 509
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Adjustment of Blade Pressure

Figure 503

30-41-00
Page 510
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. Wiper Blade — Removal / Installation
A. General
This procedure applies to Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 160 Pre-SB 200-30-331.
Windshield wipers are installed on pilot and copilot windshields.
B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Circuit breaker safety clips ................................................................................................. Standard
Rigging pin, 1/8 inch ........................................................................................................... Standard
CONSUMABLES
Water ................................................................................................................................... Standard
(1) References
• External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices
• External Electrical Power - Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance
Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Windshield Wipers System - Functional Test / Adjustment, 30-41-00, Adjustment / Test
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE ON WINDSHIELD WIPER
SYSTEM PULL WINDSHIELD HEAT POWER L / R, CONTR L / R AND
SIDE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ON OVERHEAD PANEL.
IF CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE NOT PULLED DURING MAINTENANCE,
PERSONNEL MAY RECEIVE AN ELECTRICAL SHOCK WHEN
WINDSHIELD IS TOUCHED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND / OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
(b) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

HEAT SIDE Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT POWER L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT POWER R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT CONTR L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT CONTR R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
WIPERS L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
WIPERS R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD

(c) Ensure wipers are in parked position. If not, perform the following:

30-41-05
Page 401
April 30/12
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1 Connect external electrical power to aircraft. See External Electrical Power -

Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
2 Depress WIPERS L and R circuit breakers.
3 Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switch to OFF/PARK position.
4 Pull WIPERS L and R circuit breakers.
5 Disconnect external electrical power from aircraft. See External Electrical Power
- Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
C. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Lift wiper arm (1) and insert 1/8 inch rig pin in pin hole (2).
(2) Remove bolt (3) and flat washer (4) attaching wiper blade (5) to wiper arm (1).
(3) Remove wiper blade (5) from wiper arm (1).
D. Installation
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Attach wiper blade (5) to wiper arm (1).
NOTE: Blades should always be installed with the wiper in the parked position.
(2) Install bolt (3) and flat washer (4) securing wiper blade (5) to wiper arm (1).
(3) Remove rig pin from wiper arm (1).
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.B.(2)(b).
CAUTION: DURING WIPER OPERATION WINDSHIELD MUST CONTINUOUSLY BE
SPRAYED WITH WATER. OPERATION ON DRY WINDSHIELDS CAN CAUSE
MOTOR OVERLOADING AND SCRATCHES ON WINDSHIELD GLASS.
(3) Perform Windshield Wipers System - Functional Test / Adjustment, 30-41-00, Adjustment /
Test.
(4) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-41-05
Page 402
April 30/12
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Windshield Wiper Blade

Figure 401
2. Windshield Wiper Arm — Removal / Installation
A. General
The following procedure applies to Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 160 Pre-SB 200-30-331.

30-41-05
Page 403
April 30/12
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

B. Preparation
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

Circuit breaker safety clips ................................................................................................. Standard

CONSUMABLES
Bolt ............................................................................................................. AN173H3A (as required)
Water ................................................................................................................................... Standard
(1) References
• External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices
• External Electrical Power - Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance
Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Windshield Wipers System - Functional Test / Adjustment, 30-41-00, Adjustment / Test
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE ON WINDSHIELD WIPER
SYSTEM PULL WINDSHIELD HEAT POWER L / R, CONTR L / R AND
SIDE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ON OVERHEAD PANEL.
IF CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE NOT PULLED DURING MAINTENANCE,
PERSONNEL MAY RECEIVE AN ELECTRICAL SHOCK WHEN
WINDSHIELD IS TOUCHED. FAILURE TO COMPLY MAY RESULT IN
INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND / OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
(b) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

HEAT SIDE Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT POWER L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT POWER R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT CONTR L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT CONTR R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
WIPERS L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
WIPERS R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD

(c) Ensure wipers are in parked position. If not, perform the following:
1 Connect external electrical power to aircraft. See External Electrical Power -
Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
2 Depress WIPERS L and R circuit breakers.
3 Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switch to OFF/PARK position.
4 Pull WIPERS L and R circuit breakers.

30-41-05
Page 404
April 30/12
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

5 Disconnect external electrical power from aircraft. See External Electrical Power
- Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(d) Remove wiper blade from arm. See Wiper Blade - Removal / Installation, 30-41-05,
Removal / Installation or Code 304009.
C. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 402.
(1) Remove bolt (1) from wiper arm (2).
(2) Remove arm (2) from aircraft.
D. Installation
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 402.
(1) Position arm (2) in mounting location.
(2) Install bolt (1) securing arm (2).
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Install wiper blade on arm. See Wiper Blade - Removal / Installation, 30-41-05, Removal /
Installation or Code 304009.
(3) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 2.B.(2)(b).
CAUTION: DURING WIPER OPERATION WINDSHIELD MUST CONTINUOUSLY BE
SPRAYED WITH WATER. OPERATION ON DRY WINDSHIELDS CAN CAUSE
MOTOR OVERLOADING AND SCRATCHES ON WINDSHIELD GLASS.
(4) Perform Windshield Wipers System - Functional Test / Adjustment, 30-41-00, Adjustment /
Test.
(5) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-41-05
Page 405
April 30/12
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEE DETAIL A

DETAIL A 96555J00

Wiper Arm
Figure 402

30-41-05
Page 406
April 30/12
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR CONVERTER — ADJUSTMENT / TEST

1. Windshield Wiper Motor — Functional Test
NOTE: This procedure applies to Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 160 Pre-SB 200-30-331.
A. Preparation
CONSUMABLES

Tape, Mylar laminate ........................................................................................................... Standard

(1) References
• External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices
• External Electrical Power - Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance
Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
(3) Ensure the following Circuit Breakers (CB) are depressed:

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

HEAT SIDE Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT CONTR L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT CONTR R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT POWER L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
HEAT POWER R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
WIPERS L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
WIPERS R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD

(4) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to OFF/PARK position.

(5) Connect external electrical power to aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Connection to
Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
B. Procedure
CAUTION: DURING WIPER OPERATION THE WINDSHIELDS MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY
SPRAYED WITH WATER. OPERATION ON DRY WINDSHIELDS CAN CAUSE
MOTOR OVERLOADING AND SCRATCHES ON WINDSHIELD GLASS.
NOTE: The sweeping rate is 120 ±18 strokes per minute in slow speed mode and 180 ±27 strokes
per minute is fast speed mode.
During wiper operation, ensure windshield is sprayed continuously with water.
(1) Depress WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R circuit breakers on cockpit overhead panel.
(2) Tape Mylar laminate on window for wiper blades to ride on. Otherwise ensure windows
remain wet to prevent possibility of scratches to window surface.

30-41-10
Page 501
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(3) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to SLOW and FAST positions to operate
wiper arms several cycles in fast and slow speeds modes.
(4) Ensure sweeping area is within limits shown in Figure 501.
(5) Select WINDSHIELD WIPERS L and R switches to OFF/PARK position.
C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) If installed, remove laminate off windows.
(3) Remove external electrical power from aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Disconnection
from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(4) Restore circuit breakers in Step 1.A.(3) to normal configuration.
(5) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-41-10
Page 502
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Windshield Wipers - Sweeping Area

Figure 501

30-41-10
Page 503
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-41-10
Page 504
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR CONVERTER — INSPECTION / CHECK

1. Windshield Wiper Motor / Wipers — Visual Inspection
NOTE: This procedure applies to Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 135 Pre-SB 200-05-280 and Pre-SB 200-30-
331.
A. Preparation
(1) References
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Electronic Flight Displays - Removal / Installation, 34-21-15, Removal / Installation or
Code 342301
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
NOTE: Windshield wiper motors are located under the glareshield and may require
removal of one or more electronic flight displays to complete this inspection.
(b) Remove electronic flight displays (EFD-4077) from instrument panels, if required. See
Electronic Flight Displays - Removal / Installation, 34-21-15, Removal / Installation or
Code 342301.
B. Inspection
NOTE: The following procedure is used in conjunction with Figure 601.
(1) Inspect windshield wiper motors and wipers for physical condition and security.
C. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Install electronic flight displays (EFD-4077), if removed. See Electronic Flight Displays -
Removal / Installation, 34-21-15, Removal / Installation or Code 342301.
(3) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-41-10
Page 601
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Windshield Wiper Motor and Wipers

Figure 601

30-41-10
Page 602
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR CONVERTER — REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

1. Windshield Wiper Motor Converter — Removal / Installation
A. General
This procedure applies to Aircraft 004 thru Aircraft 160 Pre-SB 200-30-331.
The windshield wiper motor converters are located on the lower section of windshield frame,
between FS 122.16 (3103 mm) and FS 128.85 (3273 mm).
B. Preparation
CONSUMABLES
O-ring .......................................................................................................................... NAS1611-018
Safety wire ................................................................................................................... MS20995C32
(1) References
• External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices
• External Electrical Power - Disconnection from Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance
Practices
• Safe Ground Maintenance Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices
• Windshield Wipers System - Functional Test / Adjustment, 30-41-00, Adjustment / Test
• Electronic Flight Displays - Removal / Installation, 34-21-15, Removal / Installation or
Code 342301
(2) Aircraft Preparation
(a) Prepare aircraft for safe ground maintenance. See Safe Ground Maintenance
Procedure, 20-00-10, Maintenance Practices.
WARNING: BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE ON WINDSHIELD WIPER
SYSTEM PULL WINDOW HEAT L / R POWER, L / R CONTR AND
SIDE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ON OVERHEAD PANEL.
IF CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE NOT PULLED DURING MAINTENANCE,
PERSONNEL MAY RECEIVE AN ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF
WINDSHIELD IS TOUCHED.
(b) Pull, tag and install safety clips on the following Circuit Breakers (CB):

CB NAME CB PANEL CB LOCATION

SIDE Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
POWER L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
POWER R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
CONTR L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
CONTR R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
WIPER L Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD
WIPERS R Cockpit overhead WINDSHIELD

C. Removal
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.

30-41-10
Page 401
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(1) Remove arm retaining bolt (2) securing wiper blade arm (1) to motor shaft (12).
(2) Remove wiper blade arm (1) from motor shaft (12).
(3) Remove electronic flight displays (EFD 4077) from instrument panels. See Electronic Flight
Displays - Removal / Installation, 34-21-15, Removal / Installation or Code 342301.
(4) Disconnect electrical connector (5) from motor converter (6).
(5) Install protective caps and plugs on all open lines, ports and electrical connections.
(6) Remove safety wire (13) securing mounting bolts (8) and nut (10).
(7) Remove mounting bolts (8) and washers (9) securing motor converter (6) to mounting bracket
(3).
(8) Remove nut (10) and washer (11) from stud (7).
(9) Remove motor converter (6) and O-ring (4) from mounting bracket.
D. Installation
NOTE: The following numbers in parentheses ( ) are used in conjunction with Figure 401.
(1) Position O-ring (4) on motor shaft (12).
(2) Position motor converter (6) on mounting bracket (3).
(3) Install washer (11) and nut (10) securing motor converter (6) to stud (7).
(4) Install washers (9) and mounting bolts (8) securing motor converter (6) to mounting bracket
(3).
(5) Remove all protective caps and plugs from lines, ports and electrical connections.
(6) Connect electrical connector (5) to motor converter (6).
(7) Position wiper blade arm (1) on motor shaft (12).
(8) Install arm retaining bolt (2) securing wiper arm (1) to motor shaft (12).
(9) Secure mounting bolts (8) and nut (10) using safety wire as shown in Figure 401.
E. Follow On
(1) Inspect for presence of foreign objects.
(2) Remove safety clips, tags and depress circuit breakers pulled in Step 1.B.(2)(b).
(3) Apply external electrical power to aircraft. See External Electrical Power - Connection to
Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(4) Perform Windshield Wipers System - Functional Test / Adjustment, 30-41-00, Adjustment /
Test.
(5) Remove External Electrical Power - Connection to Aircraft, 12-00-01, Maintenance Practices.
(6) Install electronic flight displays (EFD 4077) in instrument panel. See Electronic Flight Displays
- Removal / Installation, 34-21-15, Removal / Installation or Code 342301.
(7) Record all maintenance actions in accordance with current governing authority.

30-41-10
Page 402
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Windshield Wiper Motor Converter

Figure 401

30-41-10
Page 403
November 30/08
 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30-41-10
Page 404
November 30/08